Windows Manual PDF

ly!
A Presentation of TeachUcomp Incorporated.
on
Copyright © TeachUcomp, Inc. 2013
es
os
Mastering
rp
Windows Made
pu
Easy™ v.8.1
n
tio
lua
TeachUcomp, Inc.
va
…it’s all about you

e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa
Mastering Windows Made Easy v.8.1
ly!
Copyright:
on
Copyright © 2013 by TeachUcomp, Inc. All rights reserved. This publication, or any part thereof,
may not be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, recording, photocopying, or otherwise, without the express written permission of
TeachUcomp, Inc.
es
For PDF manuals, TeachUcomp, Inc. allows the owner of the PDF manual to make up to 2
additional copies of the PDF manual that the owner may place on up to 2 additional non-shared computer
hard drives for ease of use when using the accompanying DVD tutorials. TeachUcomp, Inc. also grants
os
unlimited personal printing rights to the owner, strictly limited to the purposes of not-for-profit personal or
private education or research.
The unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this copyrighted work is illegal. Criminal copyright
rp
infringement, including infringement without monetary gain, is investigated by the FBI and is punishable by
up to five years in federal prison and a fine of $250,000.
pu
Trademark Acknowledgements:
Windows, Windows XP, Windows Vista, Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 8.1, Microsoft Word XP,
Microsoft Word 2003, Microsoft Word 2007, Microsoft Excel XP, Microsoft Excel 2003, Microsoft Excel
n
2007, Microsoft Access XP, Microsoft Access 2003, Microsoft Access 2007, Microsoft PowerPoint XP,
tio
Microsoft PowerPoint 2003, Microsoft PowerPoint 2007, Microsoft Outlook XP, Microsoft Outlook 2003,
Microsoft Outlook 2007, Microsoft Publisher XP, Microsoft Publisher 2003, Microsoft Publisher 2007,
Microsoft Office XP, Microsoft Office 2003, Microsoft Office 2007, Microsoft Internet Explorer, Windows
lua
Defender, and Microsoft Security Essentials are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Other
brand names and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
Disclaimer:
va
While every precaution has been made in the production of this book, TeachUcomp, Inc. assumes
no responsibility for errors or omissions. Nor is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of
the information contained herein. These training materials are provided without any warranty whatsoever,
e
including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. All
names of persons or companies in this manual are fictional, unless otherwise noted.
or
-f
ple
m
TeachUcomp, Inc.
Sa
Phone: (877) 925-8080

Web: http://www.teachucomp.com
©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 2

Introduction and Overview
ly!
Welcome to TeachUcomp, Inc.’s Mastering Windows
on
Made Easy v. 8.1 course. This course is designed to
introduce the new computer user to the concepts and skills
es
necessary to operate in the Windows 8.1 environment.
Microsoft Windows is an operating system that controls
os
the overall activity of your computer. Many software
applications, such as Word- a word processing program,
rp
Excel- a spreadsheet program, and Access- a database
pu
program, operate in a Windows environment.
Mastering Windows is essential in today’s world of fast-
n
paced technology growth. Windows is one of the most
tio
commonly used operating systems for desktop computers.
Now, however, mobile computing can be performed with
lua
Windows on laptops, tablets, and other mobile computing

devices. Starting with Windows 8, which can be installed
va
on many of your devices, you can now share a more

standardized and unified computing experience between
e
your devices.
or
This class is designed to give you a general overview

of the functionality of Windows in Windows 8.1. In this
-f
course, you will explore the basics of using Windows:

ple
working with files, creating and saving documents,

customizing your user interface, changing Windows
m
settings, and using Internet Explorer 11.

Sa

Table of Contents
ly!
Chapters/Lessons: Page(s): Chapters/Lessons: Page(s):
on
CHAPTER 1- Introduction to Windows 5 CHAPTER 5- Desktop Management 89
1.1- About Windows 6 5.1- Changing Desktop Icons 90
1.2- The Start Screen in Windows 8.1 7 5.2- The Recycle Bin 90
1.3- Customizing the Start Screen in Windows 8.1 8-9 5.3- Creating Desktop Shortcuts 91
1.4- Using the Charm Bar in Windows 8.1 9-10 5.4- Pinning Items to the Taskbar 91
es
1.5- The Windows Desktop 10 5.5- Moving and Resizing the Taskbar 92
1.6- The Start Button 10 5.6- Setting the Date and Time Display 92
1.7- Booting to the Desktop at Startup 11 Desktop Management- Actions 93-95
1.8- The Mouse 12 Desktop Management- Exercises 96
1.9- Touch Gestures in Windows 8.1 13
os
1.10- App Snapping in Windows 8.1 14 CHAPTER 6- Using Apps in Windows 8.1 97
1.11- Using a Microsoft User Account in Windows 8.1 14 6.1- Downloading Apps from the Windows Store 98
1.12- Resizing a Desktop Window 15 6.2- Managing Files in Apps 99
1.13- Scrolling a Window 16 6.3- Using the SkyDrive App 99-100
rp
1.14- Shutting Down Windows 16 Using Apps in Windows 8.1- Actions 101-104
Introduction to Windows- Actions 17-24 Using Apps in Windows 8.1- Exercises 105
Introduction to Windows- Exercises 25
CHAPTER 7- Creating Documents 106
pu
CHAPTER 2- File Explorer 26 7.1- Starting WordPad and Creating a New Document 107
2.1- File Explorer in Windows 8.1 27-28 7.2- Copying and Pasting Text 108
2.2- Navigating Folders 28-29 7.3- Formatting Text 109
2.3- Changing Folder Views 29 7.4- Saving a Document 110
2.4- Sorting Folder Contents 29-30 7.5- Opening a Document 110
2.5- Selecting Files
2.6- Opening a File
30
31
n
7.6- Printing a Document
7.7- Closing a Document
110
110
tio
2.7- Reopening a Recently Opened Folder 31 Creating Documents- Actions 111-113
2.8- Creating a New Folder 31 Creating Documents- Exercises 114
2.9- Renaming Files and Folders 31
2.10- Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Files and Folders 32 CHAPTER 8- Drawing Pictures 115
2.11- Burning a CD or DVD 33 8.1- Starting Paint and Creating a New Document 116
lua
2.12- Deleting Files 33 8.2- Drawing Shapes and Lines 116

2.13- Managing Libraries in Windows 8.1 34 8.3- Adding Text 117
2.14- Managing the Computer and Drives in Windows 8.1 35 8.4- Erasing Parts of a Picture 117
File Explorer- Actions 36-43 8.5- Saving a Picture 117
File Explorer- Exercises 44 8.6- Opening a Picture 117
va
Drawing Pictures- Actions 118-119

CHAPTER 3- Windows 8.1 Settings 45 Drawing Pictures- Exercises 120
3.1- Accessing Settings in Windows 8.1 46
3.2- The “PC and devices” Settings 47-49 CHAPTER 9- Using the Internet 121
3.3- The “Accounts” Settings 49-50 9.1- About the Internet 122
e
3.4- The “SkyDrive” Settings 50-51 9.2- Using the Desktop Internet Explorer 11 123
3.5- The “Search and apps” Settings 51-52 9.3- Using the Internet Explorer 11 App 124-125
3.6- The “Privacy” Settings 53 9.4- Connecting to the Internet 126
or
3.7- The “Network” Settings 54-55 9.5- Windows Defender in Windows 8.1 126
3.8- The “Time and language” Settings 55 Using the Internet- Actions 127-130
3.9- The “Ease of Access” Settings 56-57 Using the Internet- Exercises 131
3.10- The “Update and recovery” Settings 57-58
-f
Windows 8.1 Settings- Actions 59-72 CHAPTER 10- Printing Information 132
Windows 8.1 Settings- Exercises 73 10.1- Selecting a Printer 133
10.2- General Printing Options 133
ple
CHAPTER 4- Control Panel Settings 74 10.3- Managing Print Jobs 133

4.1- The Control Panel 75 10.4- Printing from Internet Explorer 11 134
4.2- Personalizing the Desktop 76-77 Printing Information- Actions 135-136
4.3- Changing Screen Resolution 77 Printing Information- Exercises 137
4.4- Backup and Restore Files in Windows 8.1 78
4.5- System Restore 79 Windows 8.1 Keyboard Shortcuts 138-139
m
4.6- Audio Adjustment 80

4.7- Adding Devices and Printers 81
4.8- Installing and Uninstalling Software 81
Sa
Control Panel Settings- Actions 82-87

Control Panel Settings- Exercises 88

CHAPTER 1-
Introduction to Windows
ly!
on
1.1- About Windows
1.2- The Start Screen in Windows 8.1
es
1.3- Customizing the Start Screen in Windows 8.1
os
1.4- Using the Charm Bar in Windows 8.1
rp
1.5- The Windows Desktop
pu
1.6- The Start Button
n
1.7- Booting to the Desktop at Startup
tio
1.8- The Mouse
lua
1.9- Touch Gestures in Windows 8.1

va
1.10- App Snapping in Windows 8.1

e
1.11- Using a Microsoft User Account in Windows 8.1

or
1.12- Resizing a Desktop Window

-f
1.13- Scrolling a Window

ple
1.14- Shutting Down Windows

m
Sa

ly!
1.1- About Windows:
on
Windows is a family of operating systems developed by Microsoft Corporation. Windows provides a
graphical user interface (GUI), virtual memory management, multitasking, and support for many peripheral
devices. Starting in Windows 8, you also have a new “Windows 8” style interface that provides a standard
es
user interface across your computing devices to create a unified user environment.
Windows helps you organize all of the files and programs within your computer. For new users, one
way to think of the file management aspect of Windows is to think of a large paper filing cabinet. Within the
os
filing cabinet, there are hanging files labeled in a logical order. Within those hanging files, there are manila
file folders that contain documents. Windows allows you to accomplish the same document filing system in
an electronic format. You can open, sort, move, print, rename, find or delete files easily by using Windows.
rp
In addition to managing the computer’s files, folders, hardware settings, and software applications,
Windows has much more to offer. Windows offers basic text and image editing software, as well email and
a web browser called “Internet Explorer.” The new “Store” app that was introduced in Windows 8 also
pu
provides you with many types of free and paid software that you can easily download and install on all of
your Windows 8 devices- including desktop computers, laptops, tablets, and smart phones.
This course will focus on Windows version 8.1. Many of the features that will be discussed within
this course are changes to the Windows operating system that were first introduced in Windows version 8.
n
Windows 8.1 is a free download that is available from Microsoft though the “Store” app or via the Microsoft
website that makes some improvements to the basic Windows 8 software. You will find that many of the
tio
features that will be discussed are also applicable to Windows 8 as well, if you are still running that version
of the Windows operating system. If that is the case, however, you should be aware that the upgrade to
Windows 8.1 is free and available as a download within either the “Store” app in Windows 8 or through the
lua
Microsoft website at http://www.microsoft.com.

e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
1.2- The Start Screen in Windows 8.1:
on
The Start screen was a new addition to the operating system first introduced in Windows 8. The
Start screen is available on desktops, laptops, and tablets that run Windows 8 or later. You can scroll
across the tiles shown within the Start screen to view many of the programs installed on your computer.
es
Each tile represents an application, often referred to an “app.” Apps, or applications, are software programs.
Some app tiles shown within the Start screen are called “Live Tiles” and display information from that
particular app, such as the number of unread emails in your “Mail” application tile or the latest headlines
os
within the “News” app. You can acquire new apps for your computer within the Windows “Store” app in the
Start screen. To open an app from the Start screen, click the desired app tile. Older applications that run
within the Desktop environment will still need to be run from the Desktop- which is now treated as if it were
rp
just another Windows 8-style app. There have been many other changes made to the Desktop from version
7 to version 8 in Windows, as well. We will review the Desktop in Windows 8.1 within the lesson on the
Desktop environment within Windows 8.1 in a later part of this course. The Start screen is based on the
pu
Windows 8 screen style popularized on the Windows phone and incorporated into the Xbox screen. Now it
is making its appearance in Windows 8.1, giving you a consistent user experience whether you are using a
Windows Phone, an Xbox gaming system, or a computing device.
When using the Start screen, you can navigate using either a mouse or touch-based interface such
n
as a tablet screen or touchpad. The Start screen uses hotspots within the corners of the screen to allow you
to access other features or areas in your computer. For example, you can place your pointer to the upper-
tio
left side of the screen to display a small tile of the most recently displayed open application window. You
can then slide your mouse pointer down the left side of the screen to display a tiled sidebar that shows any
other open app windows. You can click the desired app window tile to display it in full-screen mode. Within
lua
any app window, you can roll to the hotspot in the lower-left corner, now shown as the “Start” button
beginning in Windows 8.1, and click it to return to the Start screen. Alternately, you can press the Windows
key on your keyboard to display the Start screen at any time.
You can access a charm bar at the right side of the window by rolling your mouse pointer into the
va
upper-right or lower-right corners of the screen. The charm bar will then appear and you can roll your
mouse pointer over it to access its content. You can also open it by swiping in from the right edge of a touch
screen, or by pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard. The charm bar allows you to perform
e
actions such as sharing and saving content between your currently opened app and online storage, such as
SkyDrive, which is included in Windows 8.1. The default icons shown within the charm bar are “Search,”
“Share,” “Start,” “Devices,” and “Settings.”
or
Some apps, such as the Windows 8.1 app version of Internet Explorer 11, allow you to switch
between opened tabbed windows within the app by right-clicking within the app window to display any
-f
opened tabbed windows within the app in a separate bar at the bottom of the app window. You can then
click the tabbed browser window you want to display.
When viewing an app window opened from the Start screen, you can close it by clicking and holding
ple
down at the top of the app window to grab the app window, and then dragging downward toward the bottom
of the screen. You can also click and hold down at the top of the app window and then drag the app window
to either the right or left sides of the interface to dock the app and keep it open while running other apps.
Note that users of the tablet versions of Windows 8.1 also have access to an on-screen keyboard they can
m
use for text entry to replace the traditional keyboard. For desktop and laptop users, you can access the
“Desktop” app itself by clicking the “Desktop” tile within the Start screen. Also, if you click any app tile for
Sa
any software applications that only operate within the Desktop environment, Windows 8.1 will automatically
switch to the Desktop to run the associated program. You can always return to the Start screen by rolling
your pointer to the lower-left corner of the screen and then clicking the “Start” button that appears.

ly!
1.3- Customizing the Start Screen in Windows 8.1:
on
You can customize the appearance of the Start screen in many ways. You can control the
placement and grouping of the app tiles, as well as name the tile groupings you create. You can also control
the appearance of many of the individual app tiles themselves within the Start screen. In this lesson, we will
es
examine how to make these types of customizations to the Start screen.
When you install apps from the Windows Store, or other software, you will see a new tile for the app
appear on the Start screen. You can also add tiles to the Start screen for software you have already
os
installed if upgrading to Windows 8.1, or for any software that is installed for which you want to create a tile
within the Start screen. One way to do this is to find the executable or application icon for which you want to
add a Start screen tile within File Explorer or the Desktop, and then right-click the icon. From the pop-up
menu that appears, select the “Pin to Start” command to add a tile for that program to the Start screen in the
rp
next available tile position within the most recent tile group. Another way to do this is to find the existing app
tile through the Start screen. You can display tiles for all “Apps” on your computer by clicking the small
pu
downward-pointing arrow in a circle shown in the lower-left corner of the Start screen. You will then see a
listing of all of the available app tiles within your computer. Find the tile for the app that you want to pin to
the Start screen within this list. Right-click the desired app tile to display an options bar at the bottom of the
screen. Click the “Pin to Start” icon within the options bar to pin the selected app tile to the Start screen. If
n
you right-click an app tile by mistake, you can click into the empty area within the screen to hide the options
bar again. You can click the small upward-pointing arrow in a circle shown in the lower-left corner of the
tio
screen to return to the Start screen when finished, or use any of the other ways of displaying the Start
screen that we have already mentioned to return to it if you prefer.
You can remove an app tile from the Start screen by right-clicking the app tile to remove to display
lua
the options bar at the bottom of the screen. Then click the “Unpin from Start” icon within the options bar to
remove the app tile from its tile grouping within the Start screen.
You can arrange the app tiles within the Start screen by clicking and dragging them to the desired
location and then releasing them when they are in the desired position within their tile group. Tiles are
va
aligned within their tile groups left to right and then top to bottom, however the number of tiles that you can
place next to each other from left to right and top to bottom within a group will vary based on the size of the
tiles themselves. You can create new tile groups by clicking and dragging an app tile to the far right side of
e
the Start screen past the vertical bar that appears once you have dragged it to the right as far as possible,
and then releasing the app tile to create a new tile grouping.
You can name the app tile groupings you create so you can easily tell what apps are located within
or
a group. For example, you could create a “Microsoft Office” tile grouping for your Microsoft Office
application tiles within the Start screen. After creating a tile group, you can name the group by right-clicking
-f
within the empty area within the Start screen to display the options bar at the bottom of the screen. Click the
“Customize” button within the options bar to display a “Name group” box at the top of every tile group. Click
into the “Name group” box above the tile group that you want to name and then type the name of the tile
ple
group into the box. Press the “Enter” key on your keyboard when finished naming the group. To delete a
group name, click the small “x” that appears at the right end of the group name that you want to clear. After
naming the groups, you can click into the empty area within the Start screen to hide the options bar.
You can also move entire tile groups around to reorganize their position within the Start screen. To
m
do this, click the small minus button that appears at the far right end of the scroll bar at the bottom of the
Start screen. You will then see the tile groups shown on screen in smaller groups. You can click and drag
Sa
the small tile groups that are shown to reorder the tile groups in your Start screen. When finished, simply
click the empty area within the Start screen to return to the normal Start screen view.
You can also customize the settings of the individual app tiles within the Start screen. To do this,

ly!
1.3- Customizing the Start Screen in Windows 8.1- (cont’d.):
on
right-click any app tile to display the options bar at the bottom of the screen. You can then click any button
shown within this bar to change the desired setting. The settings will vary, depending upon the app tile you
selected. However, common options include “Resize” and “Turn live tile on/off.” If you do not want to make
es
any changes to the selected app tile, click into the blank area in the Start screen to hide the options bar.
1.4- Using the Charm Bar in Windows 8.1:
os
You can use the Charm Bar that appears at the right side of Windows 8.1 to search for content,
share content within apps, return to the Start screen, manage connected devices, and access your device
rp
settings. You can access the Charm Bar by rolling your mouse pointer over to the upper-right or lower-right
corners of the screen. The charm bar will appear and you can roll your mouse pointer over it to access the
buttons within the Charm Bar. You can also open it by swiping in from the right edge of a touch screen or by
pu
pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard.
To search for content, click the “Search” button within the Charm Bar to display a “Search” pane at
the right side of the window. First select where you want to search for content by selecting a choice from the
drop-down at the top of the pane. The default is to search “Everywhere,” but you can narrow your search
n
results by selecting a specific choice from the drop-down menu, if desired. The other choices are “Settings,”
“Files,” “Web images,” and “Web videos.” Then type the text for which you want to search into the text box
tio
shown at the top of the “Search” pane. You will then see any matching results shown immediately below the
text box, grouped by category. Matching files and settings will be shown above the dividing line and web
searches that you can try will be shown below the dividing line. You can click any file or setting shown to
lua
open it within your computer. You can click any of the web searches shown to display the results of those
searches in a full-screen “Search” app. Within the “Search” app, you can click any of the pages shown to
open them in the Internet Explorer 11 app. You can also click the “Search” box in the upper-left corner of
the “Search” app to display the “Search” pane at the right side of the screen again where you can click
va
another result to display or enter a new search term. You can close the “Search” app when finished using it.
When you are within an app that support sharing, such as the “Photos” or “Videos” apps, you can
display a photo, video, or other shareable item, and then click the “Share” button within the Charm Bar to
e
open a pane to the right that shows any available apps you can use to share the item. Simply click the
name of the app you want to use to share the item to open that app and attach the item for sharing. You can
or
also use the drop-down at the top of the “Share” pane to choose what to share from the current app, if
needed. For example, if you want to share a screenshot of the app you are viewing onscreen, click the
drop-down at the top of the “Share” pane and then select “Screenshot” from the drop-down. Then select the
-f
app to use to share the screenshot within the “Share” pane. If you decide not to share an item, you can click
anywhere outside of the “Share” pane to hide it.
You can click the “Start” button within the Charm Bar to display the Start screen again whenever you
ple
need it.
You can click the “Devices” button within the Charm Bar to play content to an external device, print
content, or display content to an external display. To do this, you must be using an app that supports
playing to an external device, like the “Videos” app, printing to a printer, or displaying content on another
m
connected display. To play content to a connected playback device, click the “Devices” button within the
Charm Bar and then click the “Play” button in the “Devices” pane that appears. You can then select the
Sa
device to use for playback. To print content within an app, click the “Devices” button in the Charm Bar and
then click the “Print” button in the “Devices” pane. You can then select the printer to which you want to print
the content. To select or connect to an eternal projection device or secondary monitor, click the “Devices”
ly!
1.4- Using the Charm Bar in Windows 8.1- (cont’d.):
on
button in the Charm Bar and then click the “Project” button in the “Devices” pane. You can then select the
name of the secondary projection device to use or click the “Second screen” button that appears to set up a
secondary display to use.
es
You can click the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar to display a list of settings in a “Settings”
pane for either the app that you are currently viewing onscreen or your computer. When viewing this pane
from the Desktop app, you can click the commands shown to open various windows, such as the “Control
os
Panel” or “Help” within Windows 8.1, as well as access computer settings such as the “Power” button.
1.5- The Windows Desktop:
rp
In Windows 8.1, the Desktop is simply another app that you can access from the Start screen. You
can open the Desktop in Windows 8.1 from the Start screen by clicking the “Desktop” app tile within the
pu
Start screen. Some other apps will also be opened within the Desktop app in Windows 8.1 to maintain
compatibility with the environment for which the software was designed. For example, if you add an app tile
for a Microsoft Word 2013 installation to the Start screen in Windows 8.1, then Windows will open that
application within the Desktop environment when you launch the program from the Start screen.
n
Within the Desktop app, you can place shortcuts to your favorite files, folders, and programs. These
tio
shortcuts are displayed as icons on your Desktop screen. The icons shown on the Desktop, as well as the
background wallpaper shown and general color scheme used within the Desktop can be customized for
each user account on the computer.
lua
One icon commonly shown icon on the Desktop is the Recycle Bin. This is where files that have
been deleted from your computer’s “C:” drive will be temporarily stored until you decide to permanently
delete them. Note that when you delete files from removable media or network locations those files are NOT
sent to the Recycle Bin, but are permanently deleted instead. So it is important when working on a network
va
that you do not assume that files and folders you delete from network drives will go to the Recycle Bin. Be
careful with the files that you delete from your computer.
At the bottom of the Desktop is a thin bar known as the Taskbar. The Start button is shown at the left
e
end of this bar in Windows 8.1. To the right of that are shortcuts to the desktop version of Internet Explorer
and File Explorer. After that you will then see icons for any currently opened applications within the Desktop
app. At the far right end of the Taskbar are icons for background app that are running on your computer as
or
well as the date and time.

-f
1.6- The Start Button:
The Start button in Windows 8.1 is a small button that displays the Windows logo and is shown in
ple
the lower-left corner of the screen when you hover over that corner in the Start screen. It is always displayed
at the left end of the Taskbar at the bottom of the Desktop app. You can click the Start button to display the
Start screen within Windows 8.1. You can right-click the Start button to display a pop-up menu of shortcuts
m
to various windows and control panels that you may want to access on your computer. To open any one of
these windows, simply click the desired command in the pop-up menu that appears. A handy shortcut is the
“Shut down or sign out” command. If you roll your mouse pointer over this command you will see the options
Sa
that you have to shut down or sign out of your computer shown in a side menu that appears. You can then
select the desired command to execute in the side menu to quickly sign out of your account or shut down
the computer.
ly!
1.7- Booting to the Desktop at Startup:
on
Starting in Windows 8.1, you now have the option of booting directly to the Desktop when you sign-in
to your computer. You can also display the Desktop instead of the Start screen after closing all apps on a
screen. In order to do this, first open the “Desktop” app by clicking that tile within the Start screen.
es
Within the Desktop, right-click the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen and then click the “Properties”
command within the pop-up menu that appears. Doing that will display the “Taskbar and Navigation
properties” dialog box onscreen. Click the “Navigation” tab at the top of the “Properties” dialog box.
os
You can then check the “When I sign in or close all apps on a screen, go to the desktop instead of
Start” checkbox to enable booting to the desktop. Then click the “OK” button to set the new sign-in routine.
You will then need to reboot your computer. When you sign-in to your computer after rebooting, you will
rp
then be taken directly to the Desktop instead of the Start screen.
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
1.8- The Mouse:
on
One way to navigate through the Windows environment is by using your mouse. A mouse is a
device that you control with your hand. You roll it around on a pad. This allows you to move the mouse
pointer, usually an “arrow” icon, on your screen to select files and folders. There are many variations of the
es
mouse, but they are all designed to perform the same basic functions.
When you move your mouse while it is on your desk, the pointer on your screen moves in the same
direction. The mouse pointer can also assume different shapes, depending upon your location on the
os
Desktop and what type of tasks you are performing.
To control the mouse, position your hand on the mouse with your thumb at the side and your two
closest fingers resting easily over the two buttons at the top of the mouse. Your two fingers are used to
press the buttons, or perform the “clicks,” of the mouse.
rp
Your mouse has four basic actions to master. They are “click,” “double-click,” “right-click” and “click
and drag” (or “drag and drop”). The different actions and what they are used for are illustrated in this table.
pu
Name: Movement: What it is used for:
Left-click or “click” A single “press and release”

of the left mouse button
n Selecting objects and executing toolbar
button functions.
tio
Double-click Two quick “press and Running program and applications. Also used to
release” movements with open folders and files.
lua
the left mouse button in

rapid succession.
va
Click and drag A single press of the left Moving file and folders. Selecting objects and text.
mouse button that you hold
down as you roll the mouse
e
to a new location and then

release it.
or
Right-click A single “press and release” Shows a pop-up menu of commands that are
of the right mouse button. available for the object that you right-clicked.
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
1.9- Touch Gestures in Windows 8.1:
on
In Windows 8.1, many of the actions for which you previously would use a mouse can now be
performed by using gestures on a touch screen for computing devices that support this behavior. In this
lesson, we will examine the various gestures that are available in Windows 8.1 for touch screen devices,
es
and which gestures translate to the traditional mouse clicks and movements.
Name: Movement: What it is used for:
os
“Tap” or “Touch” Tap once onscreen Opens or selected item that is tapped. Similar to a
left-mouse click.
rp
Press and hold Touch onscreen and hold Displays information about the selected item, or
pu
your finger in position opens a menu specific to what you’re doing. Similar
to a right-click with a mouse.
Pinch or Stretch Touch the screen with two fingers Shows different levels of information. Zooms in or out
n
and then either bring them closer
together (Pinch), or further away
to magnify items displayed onscreen.
tio
from each other (Stretch)
lua
Rotate Touch the screen with two fingers Rotates onscreen items in the direction specified.
and then turn your hand clockwise Not all items can be rotated.
or counterclockwise
va
Slide Move your finger or fingers across Moves through onscreen content. Similar to scrolling
the screen with the wheel of a mouse. When used on a selected
item, can move the selected item. Similar to clicking
e
and dragging with your mouse.

or
Swipe Move your finger or fingers a short If you swipe across an app tile or other selectable
distance across the screen item contrary to the direction the page scrolls, it will
select the item. You can also swipe in from the right
-f
edge of the screen to open the Charm Bar, swipe in

from the left edge to show open apps, or swipe in
from the top or bottom edge to display basic file
ple
commands. You can swipe from the top of an app to

the bottom edge to close an app by dragging it off
screen.
m
Sa

ly!
1.10- App Snapping in Windows 8.1:
on
While the ability to “snap” an app window to the side of the screen was introduced in earlier versions
of Windows, you will find that snapping apps to the side of the screen is even easier in Windows 8.1. This
feature allows you to lock up to four app windows open at a time so that you can have multiple windows
es
open without having to toggle between them or having them overlap one another. The number of apps that
you can display at once is related to the screen resolution of your screen. In Windows 8.1 you can also set
the size of the snapped app windows to any ratio that you would like. They no longer are restricted to a
os
quarter of the window.
Note that to have app snapping enabled in Windows 8.1, you must be using a screen resolution of at
least 1366x768. To snap an open app window to a side of the screen, click and drag at the top of the app
rp
window to either the left or the right until you see a think black bar appear. Then release the app window
into that section of the screen. The app will then only display within that section of the screen, with the black
bar acting as its border. You can then open another app window and it will appear within the remaining
pu
section of that screen, with the black bar acting as the border between the two open apps. You can place
your mouse pointer over the black bar and then click and drag to change the size of the panes that are
shown. If you have the space available onscreen, you can open yet another app window, which will appear
between the two open panes in the screen. You can then click and drag the new opened app window
n
between the two panes until it opens a new pane, and then release the app into the new third pane shown.
You can, of course, resize the space allotted to each pane by using the black bars that appears between
tio
them to change their sizes. You can also close the opened app windows in the usual manner by clicking
and dragging them from the top of the app window all the way to the bottom of the screen. If you close an
app window, you may need to resize it to fill-in the empty area shown, if desired. You can do this when left
lua
with only one app window open to reset the display of that app to full-screen size once again.
You can also snap apps to the sides of the “Desktop” app when it is opened. To do this, open two
windows within the Desktop application and ensure that they are both in “Restore” window mode. Then click
and drag one of the opened windows to the side of the Desktop until you see a thin gray overlay appear at
va
that side of the screen. When you release the window, it will snap to the side of the Desktop. You can then
repeat this process with the other opened window to snap the two windows side by side within the Desktop.
e
1.11- Using a Microsoft User Account in Windows 8.1:

or
Windows 8.1 allows you to use a “Microsoft” user account versus a “Local” user account. If you
already have an old Hotmail e-mail address, an XBOX Live e-mail, a Windows phone, or a Windows Live e-
mail, you can use those e-mail addresses as your Microsoft Account e-mail address. If you want to create a
-f
new e-mail address, you can sign-up for a free e-mail account at the new “Outlook.com” website, which
used to be “Hotmail.” The website address is http://www.outlook.com. You can sign-in to Windows 8.1 using
ple
an email address and password. This email address will then become your Microsoft account. Note that this
account can be either a “Standard” or “Administrator” account on the local PC on which it is entered. After
you sign-in to Windows 8.1 on a device with a Microsoft account, you will be connected to a computer
network referred to as the “cloud.” That allows the following features to be enabled. First, any social
m
networking and email applications associated with the email address, such as Outlook.com, Facebook or
Twitter will be updated automatically. You will also be able to access and share files on the web though
providers such as SkyDrive or Facebook. Also, your Windows 8.1 settings will be synced to any device
Sa
running Windows 8.1 that you sign into using the same email address. You can also get apps in the
Windows Store and use them on any Windows 8.1 computing device that you sign into with the account.

ly!
1.12- Resizing a Desktop Window:
on
The window is the basic element of the Windows operating system. You perform all activities in
different windows within the application. Windows that appear within the Desktop will most often share a
similar structure and layout. In this lesson, we will examine the features and functions that are commonly
es
found within a standard Desktop window.
Desktop windows will appear within a frame. At the top of the frame is the “Title Bar.” The Title Bar
will usually display the name of the window or its contents. You use the title bar to control the size and
os
placement of the window in your Desktop.
One of the most basic functions of the Title Bar is resizing windows. You can have several windows
open at the same time in Windows, and you can control the size and placement of the windows on your
rp
Desktop. A window can be opened either in Maximized mode, Restore mode, or Minimized mode.
If you look at the right end of the Title Bar within an open Desktop window, you will see a three-
button group. These buttons are, from left to right: “Minimize,” “Maximize/Restore,” and “Close.” You can
pu
click the Minimize button in the Title Bar of an open window to send the window down to the Taskbar at the
bottom of the Desktop. Although you cannot see the content of the window, it is still open and active. You
may choose to minimize a window to access information in a different window behind the one that you
minimized. Minimizing a window will temporarily get it out of your way. To display the window onscreen
n
again, click the entry for that window within the Taskbar.
In Windows, when you minimize windows of the same “type,” meaning from the same program, the
tio
windows will be grouped together within the Taskbar. You can hold your mouse pointer over that group in
the Taskbar to then view the windows in the group in small pop-up windows. You can then click the one you
want to view again to restore the selected window’s onscreen display.
lua
Clicking the “Maximize/Restore” button will toggle the window between those two window modes.
“Maximizing” a window means making it large enough to fill your entire computer screen. If your window
does not fill the entire screen, then click the middle button of the three located at the right end of the Title
Bar to maximize its display. This allows you to view more of the information within a window. Many users
va
like to work in this mode as it has the most available room for each window. However, if you have multiple
windows open and they are all maximized, you cannot view them simultaneously. To switch between
multiple maximized windows, click the Taskbar icon for the window that you want to view. That will bring that
e
window to the forefront of the stack of windows, above any other opened windows, which then recede
behind it. Doing this is called “toggling” between the open windows, and is a technique that is also
necessary to master if you need to work with more than one window at a time.
or
If your window is already maximized, clicking the middle button of the three at the right end of the
Title Bar will instead change the window to its “Restore” mode. The Restore window is a smaller window
-f
that allows you to change its size and position within the Desktop. When the window is in Restore mode,
you can place your mouse pointer over the border of the window’s frame until you see a double-pointed
arrow. When you see this arrow appear, you can click and drag to change the size of the window. You can
ple
also click and drag directly in the middle of the Title Bar of a window to move it to a different area within the
Desktop. This mode is useful when you have files you want to copy from one window into another. The
Restore window mode allows you to place the opened windows side-by-side to make drag and drop copying
between them easier.
m
The last button at the right end of the title bar has a big “X” in it. This is the “Close” button, and
clicking it will close the window.
Sa

ly!
1.13- Scrolling a Window:
on
In longer web pages or documents that you have opened, you will need to use the available scroll
bars within the window to scroll through the information. Scroll bars will appear at the right and bottom sides
of a window if all of the window’s contents cannot be displayed at once. To scroll through the content within
es
a window, you can click the arrows located at either end of the scroll bars to scroll the window in that
direction. You can also click and drag the box inside the scroll bars to the desired location in the window
and then release it to scroll through the content. The location of the scroll box inside of the scroll bar
os
indicates your position within the content of the window.
rp
Scroll Box within
pu
a Scroll Bar
n
tio
lua
va
1.14- Shutting Down Windows:

e
When you need to turn off your computer, it is very important to do so properly. Do not simply
or
unplug the computer or interrupt its power source! Doing so could possibly corrupt the information
in your computer!
To properly shut down a computer using Windows 8.1, display the Start screen or Desktop and then
-f
open the Charm Bar at the right side of the screen. Then click the “Settings” button to display the “Settings”
pane. Click the “Power” button at the bottom of the “Settings” pane to view a pop-up menu of shutdown
choices. To shut down the computer, select the “Shut down” command from the pop-up menu.
ple
Alternately, you can right-click the Start button and then roll your mouse pointer over the “Shut down
or sign out” command within the pop-up menu that appears. You can then click the shutdown choice that
you want to perform in the side menu that appears: “Sign out,” “Sleep,” Shut down,” or “Restart.” Selecting
“Sign out” will sign you out of the current account on the computer. Selecting “Sleep” will cause the
m
computer to hibernate. Selecting “Shut down” will shut down the computer. Selecting “Restart” will shut
down the computer and then immediately restart it.
Sa
If you choose the “Shut down” command, note that it may take a few moments before Windows will
shut down entirely, so be patient. Once Windows has completely powered off and the computer is shut
down, then it is permissible to shut off the power supply for the computer or unplug it if necessary.

ACTIONS-
ly!
THE START SCREEN IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. You can scroll across the tiles shown within the Start screen to view many of the programs installed on
your computer. Each tile represents an application, often referred to an “app.”
2. To open an app from the Start screen, click the desired app tile.
es
3. The Start screen uses hotspots within the corners of the screen to allow you to access other features or
areas in your computer. For example, you can place your pointer to the upper-left side of the screen to
display a small tile of the most recently displayed open application window. You can then slide your
os
mouse pointer down the left side of the screen to display a tiled sidebar that shows any other open app
windows. You can click the desired app window tile to display it in full-screen mode.
4. Within any app window, you can roll to the hotspot in the lower-left corner, now shown as the “Start”
rp
button beginning in Windows 8.1, and click it to return to the Start screen.
5. Alternately, you can press the Windows key on your keyboard to display the Start screen at any time.
6. You can access a charm bar at the right side of the window by rolling your mouse pointer into the upper-
pu
right or lower-right corners of the screen. The charm bar will then appear and you can roll your mouse
pointer over it to access its content. You can also open it by swiping in from the right edge of a touch
screen, or by pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard. The charm bar allows you to perform
actions such as sharing and saving content between your currently opened app and online storage,
n
such as SkyDrive, which is included in Windows 8.1. The default icons shown within the charm bar are
“Search,” “Share,” “Start,” “Devices,” and “Settings.”
tio
7. Some apps, such as the Windows 8.1 app version of Internet Explorer 11, allow you to switch between
opened tabbed windows within the app by right-clicking within the app window to display any opened
tabbed windows within the app in a separate bar at the bottom of the app window. You can then click
lua
the tabbed browser window you want to display.

8. When viewing an app window opened from the Start screen, you can close it by clicking and holding
down at the top of the app window to grab the app window, and then dragging downward toward the
bottom of the screen.
va
9. You can also click and hold down at the top of the app window and then drag the app window to either
the right or left sides of the interface to dock the app and keep it open while running other apps.
10. Users of the tablet versions of Windows 8.1 also have access to an on-screen keyboard they can use
e
for text entry to replace the traditional keyboard.

11. For desktop and laptop users, you can access the “Desktop” app itself by clicking the “Desktop” tile
within the Start screen.
or
12. If you click any app tile for any software applications that only operate within the Desktop environment,
Windows 8.1 will automatically switch to the Desktop to run the associated program.
-f
13. You can always return to the Start screen by rolling your pointer to the lower-left corner of the screen
and then clicking the “Start” button that appears.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
CUSTOMIZING THE START SCREEN IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. When you install apps from the Windows Store, or other software, you will see a new tile for the app
appear on the Start screen.
2. To add tiles to the Start screen for any software that is installed for which you want to create a tile within
es
the Start screen, find the executable or application icon for which you want to add a Start screen tile
within File Explorer or the Desktop, and then right-click the icon. From the pop-up menu that appears,
select the “Pin to Start” command to add a tile for that program to the Start screen in the next available
os
tile position within the most recent tile group.
3. You can add a tile to the Start screen for any installed app by finding the existing app tile through the
Start screen. You can display tiles for all “Apps” on your computer by clicking the small downward-
rp
pointing arrow in a circle shown in the lower-left corner of the Start screen. You will then see a listing of
all of the available app tiles within your computer. Find the tile for the app that you want to pin to the
Start screen within this list. Right-click the desired app tile to display an options bar at the bottom of the
pu
screen. Click the “Pin to Start” icon within the options bar to pin the selected app tile to the Start screen.
4. If you right-click an app tile by mistake, you can click into the empty area within the screen to hide the
options bar again.
5. You can click the small upward-pointing arrow in a circle shown in the lower-left corner of the screen to
n
return to the Start screen when finished, or use any of the other ways of displaying the Start screen that
we have already mentioned to return to it if you prefer.
tio
6. You can remove an app tile from the Start screen by right-clicking the app tile to remove to display the
options bar at the bottom of the screen. Then click the “Unpin from Start” icon within the options bar to
remove the app tile from its tile grouping within the Start screen.
lua
7. You can arrange the app tiles within the Start screen by clicking and dragging them to the desired
location and then releasing them when they are in the desired position within their tile group.
8. You can create new tile groups by clicking and dragging an app tile to the far right side of the Start
screen past the vertical bar that appears once you have dragged it to the right as far as possible, and
va
then releasing the app tile to create a new tile grouping.

9. To name the app tile groupings you create, right-click within the empty area within the Start screen to
display the options bar at the bottom of the screen. Click the “Customize” button within the options bar to
e
display a “Name group” box at the top of every tile group. Click into the “Name group” box above the tile
group that you want to name and then type the name of the tile group into the box. Press the “Enter” key
on your keyboard when finished naming the group.
or
10. To delete a group name, click the small “x” that appears at the right end of the group name that you
want to clear. After naming the groups, you can click into the empty area within the Start screen to hide
-f
the options bar.

11. To move entire tile groups around to reorganize their position within the Start screen, click the small
minus button that appears at the far right end of the scroll bar at the bottom of the Start screen. You will
ple
then see the tile groups shown on screen in smaller groups. You can click and drag the small tile groups
that are shown to reorder the tile groups in your Start screen. When finished, simply click the empty area
within the Start screen to return to the normal Start screen view.
12. To customize the settings of the individual app tiles within the Start screen, right-click any app tile to
m
display the options bar at the bottom of the screen. You can then click any button shown within this bar
to change the desired setting. The settings will vary, depending upon the app tile you selected.
Sa
However, common options include “Resize” and “Turn live tile on/off.”
13. If you do not want to make any changes to the selected app tile, click into the blank area in the Start
screen to hide the options bar.

ACTIONS-
ly!
USING THE CHARM BAR IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. You can access the Charm Bar by rolling your mouse pointer over to the upper-right or lower-right
corners of the screen. The charm bar will appear and you can roll your mouse pointer over it to access
the buttons within the Charm Bar. You can also open it by swiping in from the right edge of a touch
es
screen or by pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard.
2. To search for content, click the “Search” button within the Charm Bar to display a “Search” pane at the
right side of the window. Select where you want to search for content by selecting a choice from the
os
drop-down at the top of the pane. Then type the text for which you want to search into the text box
shown at the top of the “Search” pane. You will then see any matching results shown immediately below
the text box, grouped by category. Matching files and settings will be shown above the dividing line and
rp
web searches that you can try will be shown below the dividing line. You can click any file or setting
shown to open it within your computer. You can click any of the web searches shown to display the
results of those searches in a full-screen “Search” app. Within the “Search” app, you can click any of the
pu
pages shown to open them in the Internet Explorer 11 app. You can also click the “Search” box in the
upper-left corner of the “Search” app to display the “Search” pane at the right side of the screen again
where you can click another result to display or enter a new search term. You can close the “Search”
app when finished using it.
n
3. To share content when you are within an app that support sharing, you can display a photo, video, or
other shareable item, and then click the “Share” button within the Charm Bar to open a pane to the right
tio
that shows any available apps you can use to share the item. Simply click the name of the app you want
to use to share the item to open that app and attach the item for sharing. You can also use the drop-
down at the top of the “Share” pane to choose what to share from the current app, if needed. For
lua
example, if you want to share a screenshot of the app you are viewing onscreen, click the drop-down at
the top of the “Share” pane and then select “Screenshot” from the drop-down. Then select the app to
use to share the screenshot within the “Share” pane. If you decide not to share an item, you can click
anywhere outside of the “Share” pane to hide it.
va
4. You can click the “Start” button within the Charm Bar to display the Start screen again whenever you
need it.
5. You can click the “Devices” button within the Charm Bar to play content to an external device, print
e
content, or display content to an external display. To do this, you must be using an app that supports
playing to an external device, like the “Videos” app, printing to a printer, or displaying content on another
connected display.
or
6. To play content to a connected playback device, click the “Devices” button within the Charm Bar and
then click the “Play” button in the “Devices” pane that appears. You can then select the device to use for
-f
playback.
7. To print content within an app, click the “Devices” button in the Charm Bar and then click the “Print”
button in the “Devices” pane. You can then select the printer to which you want to print the content.
ple
8. To select or connect to an eternal projection device or secondary monitor, click the “Devices” button in
the Charm Bar and then click the “Project” button in the “Devices” pane. You can then select the name
of the secondary projection device to use or click the “Second screen” button that appears to set up a
secondary display to use.
m
9. You can click the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar to display a list of settings in a “Settings” pane
for either the app that you are currently viewing onscreen or your computer. When viewing this pane
Sa
from the Desktop app, you can click the commands shown to open various windows, such as the
“Control Panel” or “Help” within Windows 8.1, as well as access computer settings such as the “Power”
button.

ACTIONS-
ly!
THE WINDOWS DESKTOP:
on
1. You can open the Desktop in Windows 8.1 from the Start screen by clicking the “Desktop” app tile within
the Start screen. Some other apps will also be opened within the Desktop app in Windows 8.1 to
maintain compatibility with the environment for which the software was designed. For example, if you
es
add an app tile for a Microsoft Word 2013 installation to the Start screen in Windows 8.1, Windows will
open it within the Desktop environment when you launch the program from the Start screen.
2. Within the Desktop app, you can place shortcuts to your favorite files, folders, and programs. These
os
shortcuts are displayed as icons on your Desktop screen. The icons shown on the Desktop, as well as
the background wallpaper shown and general color scheme used within the Desktop can be customized
for each user account on the computer.
rp
3. One icon commonly shown icon on the Desktop is the Recycle Bin. This is where files that have been
deleted from your computer’s “C:” drive will be temporarily stored until you decide to permanently delete
them. Note that when you delete files from removable media or network locations those files are NOT
pu
sent to the Recycle Bin, but are permanently deleted instead. So it is important when working on a
network that you do not assume that files and folders you delete from network drives will go to the
Recycle Bin. Be careful with the files that you delete from your computer.
4. At the bottom of the Desktop is a thin bar known as the Taskbar. The Start button is shown at the left
n
end of this bar in Windows 8.1. To the right of that are shortcuts to the desktop version of Internet
Explorer and File Explorer. After that you will then see icons for any currently opened applications within
tio
the Desktop app. At the far right end of the Taskbar are icons for background app that are running on
your computer as well as the date and time.
lua
THE START BUTTON:
1. The Start button in Windows 8.1 is a small button that displays the Windows logo and is shown in the
va
lower-left corner of the screen when you hover over that corner in the Start screen. It is always
displayed at the left end of the Taskbar at the bottom of the Desktop app.
2. You can click the Start button to display the Start screen within Windows 8.1.
e
3. You can right-click the Start button to display a pop-up menu of shortcuts to various windows and
control panels that you may want to access on your computer.
4. To open any one of these windows, simply click the desired command in the pop-up menu that appears.
or
5. A handy shortcut is the “Shut down or sign out” command. If you roll your mouse pointer over this
command you will see the options that you have to shut down or sign out of your computer shown in a
-f
side menu that appears. You can then select the desired command to execute in the side menu to
quickly sign out of your account or shut down the computer.
ple
BOOTING TO THE DESKTOP:
1. Open the “Desktop” app, right-click the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen, and then click the
“Properties” command within the pop-up menu that appears.
m
2. In the “Taskbar and Navigation properties” dialog box, click the “Navigation” tab at the top of the
“Properties” dialog box and then check the “When I sign in or close all apps on a screen, go to the
Sa
desktop instead of Start” checkbox to enable booting to the desktop.

3. Click the “OK” button to set the new sign-in routine and then reboot your computer.

ACTIONS-
ly!
USING THE MOUSE:
on
1. To control the mouse, position your hand on the mouse with your thumb at the side and your two closest
fingers resting easily over the two buttons at the top of the mouse. Your two fingers are used to press
the buttons, or perform the “clicks,” of the mouse.
es
2. When you move your mouse while it is on your desk, the pointer on your screen moves in the same
direction.
3. You can “click” your mouse, which is a single “press and release” of the left mouse button to select
os
objects and executing toolbar button functions.
4. You can “double-click” your mouse, which is two quick “press and release” movements with the left
mouse button in rapid succession, to open folders and files.
5. You can “click and drag” your mouse, which is a single press of the left mouse button that you hold
rp
down as you roll the mouse to a new location and then release it, to move file and folders and select
objects and text.
pu
6. You can “right-click” your mouse, which is a single “press and release’ of the right mouse button, to
show a pop-up menu of commands that are available for the object that you right-clicked.
TOUCH GESTURES IN WINDOWS 8.1: n

tio
1. In Windows 8.1, many of the actions for which you previously would use a mouse can now be
performed by using gestures on a touch screen for computing devices that support this behavior.
2. You can “Tap” or “Touch” onscreen, which is when you tap once onscreen, to open or select the item
lua
that is tapped. Similar to a left-mouse click.

3. You can “Press and hold,” which is when you touch onscreen and hold your finger in position, to display
information about the selected item, or open a menu specific to what you’re doing. Similar to a right-click
with a mouse.
va
4. You can “Pinch” or “Stretch,” which is when you touch the screen with two fingers onscreen and then
either bring them closer together (Pinch), or further away from each other (Stretch). Doing this shows
different levels of information. It is also used to zoom in or out to magnify items displayed.
5. You can “Rotate,” which is when you touch the screen with two fingers and then turn your hand
e
clockwise or counterclockwise, to rotate onscreen items in the direction specified. Not all items can be
rotated.
or
6. You can “Slide,” which is when you move your finger or fingers across the screen. This moves through
onscreen content. It is similar to scrolling with the wheel of a mouse. When used on a selected item, it is
used to move the selected item. Similar to clicking and dragging with your mouse.
-f
7. You can “Swipe,” which is when you move your finger or fingers a short distance across the screen. If
you swipe across an app tile or other selectable item contrary to the direction the page scrolls, it will
ple
select the item. You can also swipe in from the right edge of the screen to open the Charm Bar, swipe in
from the left edge to show open apps, or swipe in from the top or bottom edge to display basic file
commands. You can swipe from the top of an app to the bottom edge to close an app by dragging it off
screen.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
APP SNAPPING IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. Note that to have app snapping enabled in Windows 8.1, you must be using a screen resolution of at
least 1366 by 768.
2. To snap an open app window to a side of the screen, click and drag at the top of the app window to
es
either the left or the right until you see a think black bar appear. Then release the app window into that
section of the screen. The app will then only display within that section of the screen, with the black bar
acting as its border.
os
3. You can then open another app window and it will appear within the remaining section of that screen,
with the black bar acting as the border between the two open apps.
4. You can place your mouse pointer over the black bar and then click and drag to change the size of the
rp
panes that are shown.
5. If you have the space available, you can open yet another app window, which will appear between the
two open panes in the screen. You can then click and drag the new opened app window between the
pu
two panes until it opens a new pane, and then release the app into the new third pane shown.
6. You can, of course, resize the space allotted to each pane by using the black bars that appears
between them to change their sizes.
7. You can also close the opened app windows in the usual manner by clicking and dragging them from
n
the top of the app window all the way to the bottom of the screen. If you close an app window, you may
need to resize it to fill-in the empty area shown, if desired. You can do this when left with only one app
tio
window open to reset the display of that app to full-screen size once again.
8. You can also snap apps to the sides of the “Desktop” app when it is opened. To do this, open two
windows within the Desktop application and ensure that they are both in “Restore” window mode.
lua
9. Then click and drag one of the opened windows to the side of the Desktop until you see a thin gray
overlay appear at that side of the screen. When you release the window, it will snap to the side of the
Desktop.
10. You can then repeat this process with the other opened window to snap the two windows side by side
va
within the Desktop.

e
USING A MICROSOFT USER ACCOUNT IN WINDOWS 8.1:
1. Windows 8.1 allows you to use a “Microsoft” user account versus a “Local” user account to sign-in to
or
your computer.
2. You can sign-in to Windows 8.1 using an email address and password. This email address will then
become your Microsoft account. Note that this account can be either a “Standard” or “Administrator”
-f
account on the local PC on which it is entered.

3. When you sign-in to Windows 8.1 on a device with a Microsoft account, you will be connected to a
ple
computer network referred to as the “cloud.” That will allow the following features to be enabled.
4. First, any social networking and email applications associated with the email address, such as Hotmail,
Facebook or Twitter will be updated automatically.
5. You will also be able to access and share files on the web though providers such as SkyDrive or
m
Facebook.
6. Also, your Windows 8.1 settings will be synced to any device running Windows 8.1 that you sign into
Sa
using the same email address.

7. You can also get apps in the Windows Store and use them on any Windows 8.1 computing device that
you sign into with the account.

ACTIONS-
ly!
RESIZING A DESKTOP WINDOW:
on
1. Desktop windows will appear within a frame.
2. At the top of the frame is the “Title Bar.” The Title Bar will usually display the name of the window or its
contents. You use the title bar to control the size and placement of the window in your Desktop.
es
3. One of the most basic functions of the Title Bar is resizing windows. You can have several windows
open at the same time in Windows, and you can control the size and placement of the windows on your
Desktop. A window can be opened either in Maximized mode, Restore mode, or Minimized mode.
os
4. If you look at the right end of the Title Bar within an open Desktop window, you will see a three-button
group. These buttons are, from left to right: “Minimize,” “Maximize/Restore,” and “Close.”
5. You can click the Minimize button in the Title Bar of an open window to send the window down to the
rp
Taskbar at the bottom of the Desktop. Although you cannot see the content of the window, it is still open
and active.
6. To display the window onscreen again, click the entry for that window within the Taskbar.
pu
7. In Windows, when you minimize windows of the same “type,” meaning from the same program, the
windows will be grouped together within the Taskbar. You can hold your mouse pointer over that group
in the Taskbar to then view the windows in the group in small pop-up windows. You can then click the
one you want to view again to restore the selected window’s onscreen display.
n
8. Clicking the “Maximize/Restore” button will toggle the window between those two window modes.
9. “Maximizing” a window means making it large enough to fill your entire computer screen. If your window
tio
does not fill the entire screen, then click the middle button of the three located at the right end of the
Title Bar to maximize its display. This allows you to view more of the information within a window.
10. To switch between multiple maximized windows, click the Taskbar icon for the window that you want to
lua
view. That will bring that window to the forefront of the stack of windows, above any other opened
windows, which then recede behind it. Doing this is called “toggling” between the open windows, and is
a technique that is also necessary to master if you need to work with more than one window at a time.
11. If your window is already maximized, clicking the middle button of the three at the right end of the Title
va
Bar will instead change the window to its “Restore” mode.

12. When the window is in Restore mode, you can place your mouse pointer over the border of the
window’s frame until you see a double-pointed arrow. When you see this arrow appear, you can click
e
and drag to change the size of the window.

13. You can also click and drag directly in the middle of the Title Bar of a window to move it to a different
area within the Desktop. This mode is useful when you have files you want to copy from one window
or
into another. The Restore window mode allows you to place the opened windows side-by-side to make
drag and drop copying between them easier.
-f
14. The last button at the right end of the title bar has a big “X” in it. This is the “Close” button, and clicking it
will close the window.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
SCOLLING A WINDOW:
on
1. To scroll through the content within a window, you can click the arrows located at either end of the scroll
bars to scroll the window in that direction.
2. You can also click and drag the box inside the scroll bars to the desired location in the window and then
es
release it to scroll through the content.
3. The location of the scroll box inside of the scroll bar indicates your position within the content of the
window.
os
SHUTTING DOWN WINDOWS:
rp
1. When you need to turn off your computer, it is very important to do so properly. Do not simply unplug
the computer or interrupt its power source! Doing so could possibly corrupt the information in
your computer!
pu
2. To properly shut down a computer using Windows 8.1, display the Start screen or Desktop and then
open the Charm Bar at the right side of the screen.
3. Then click the “Settings” button to display the “Settings” pane.
4. Click the “Power” button at the bottom of the “Settings” pane to view a pop-up menu of shutdown
n
choices.
5. To shut down the computer, select the “Shut down” command from the pop-up menu.
tio
6. Alternately, you can right-click the Start button and then roll your mouse pointer over the “Shut down or
sign out” command within the pop-up menu that appears.
7. You can then click the shutdown choice that you want to perform in the side menu that appears: “Sign
lua
out,” “Sleep,” Shut down,” or “Restart.” Selecting “Sign out” will sign you out of the current account on the
computer. Selecting “Sleep” will cause the computer to hibernate. Selecting “Shut down” will shut down
the computer. Selecting “Restart” will shut down the computer and then immediately restart it.
8. If you choose the “Shut down” command, note that it may take a few moments before Windows will shut
va
down entirely, so be patient. Once Windows has completely powered off and the computer is shut down,
then it is permissible to shut off the power supply for the computer or unplug it if necessary.
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To familiarize the student with the Windows 8.1 environment.
Exercises for Windows 8.1:
es
1. Sign into your Windows 8.1 computer using either a local account or your Microsoft account.
2. Locate the “Internet Explorer” app tile located within the Start screen.
os
3. Click the “Internet Explorer” app tile within the Start screen to display Internet Explorer.
4. Click and drag from the top to the bottom of the “Internet Explorer” app window to close the app.
5. Slide your mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the screen or swipe in from the right to display
rp
the “Charm Bar” at the right side of the Start screen.
6. Roll your mouse pointer up the “Charm Bar” and then click the “Settings” charm to open the
“Settings” pane at the right side of the screen.
pu
7. Click into the Start screen to hide the display of the “Settings” pane.
8. Right-click the “Weather” app tile within the Start screen to display the Options Bar at the bottom of
the screen.
9. Click the “Turn live tile off” command within the Options Bar to turn off the weather display within the
n
tile.
tio
10. Right-click the “Weather” app tile within the Start screen to display the Options Bar at the bottom of
the screen.
11. Click the “Turn live tile on” command within the Options Bar to turn on the weather display within the
lua
tile.
12. Click the “Desktop” app tile within the Start screen to display the Desktop.
13. Click the Start button in the lower-left corner of the Desktop to switch back to the Start screen.
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 2-
File Explorer
ly!
on
2.1- File Explorer in Windows 8.1
2.2- Navigating Folders
es
2.3- Changing Folder Views
os
2.4- Sorting Folder Contents
rp
2.5- Selecting Files
pu
2.6- Opening a File
n
2.7- Reopening a Recently Opened Folder
tio
2.8- Creating a New Folder
lua
2.9- Renaming Files and Folders

va
2.10- Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Files and Folders

e
2.11- Burning a CD or DVD

or
2.12- Deleting Files

-f
2.13- Managing Libraries in Windows 8.1

ple
2.14- Managing the Computer and Drives in Windows 8.1

m
Sa

File Explorer
ly!
2.1- File Explorer in Windows 8.1:
on
File Explorer has been available in Windows for many, many years. However, in Windows 8.1, its
appearance and functionality have been enhanced. It is also called “File Explorer” in Windows 8.1 while in
most previous releases it was referred to as “Windows Explorer.” It doesn’t really matter what you call it, as
es
long as you realize that Windows Explorer and the “File Explorer” app are the same thing. In this lesson, we
will examine using File Explorer in Windows 8.1. File Explorer is a window that allows you to explore and
manage the files and folders contained within your computer. When you open a library folder within
os
Windows 8.1, for example, its content will be displayed within a File Explorer window.
You can start File Explorer as an app in Windows 8.1 by clicking the “File Explorer” app within the
“Apps” screen that you can access by clicking the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the
rp
Start screen to view all of the apps on your computer. You can access it from the Desktop by clicking the
button for “File Explorer” that appears within the Taskbar at the bottom of the screen. In Windows 8.1, the
File Explorer window contains a set of tabs at the top of the window that allows you to perform many tasks
pu
and activities on the files and folders you select within the main File Explorer window. Let’s examine the
different features and functions shown within a typical File Explorer screen in Windows 8.1.
n Tabs within the Ribbon

tio
lua
Address Bar Search Box

va
Back, Forward,
Column Names
and Up Buttons
e
Files and Folders

or
Navigation Pane
-f
ple
m
Sa
Within File Explorer, the Navigation Pane is used to select folders, drives, and navigate the
computers, folders, and files on your network. You can expand and collapse the areas shown within the
Navigation Pane, which include your Favorites, SkyDrive, Homegroup, This PC, and Network.

File Explorer
ly!
2.1- File Explorer in Windows 8.1- (cont'd.):
on
You can use the Back, Forward, and Up Buttons to navigate within the different screens that you
browse within File Explorer. You can click the Back button to return to the last page viewed, the Forward
button to move forward again after pressing the Back button, and the Up button to move up a level within
es
the folder hierarchy shown within File Explorer.
The various Tabs within the Ribbon are shown at the top of File Explorer. You will find all of your
file and folder management commands shown within the area. When you select an item within the Files
os
and Folders listing shown within File Explorer, the available commands will be shown on the tabs that
comprise the Ribbon. You can click the tabs to see the functions available within each group.
The Address Bar shows the currently selected location within your computer or network. You can
rp
also click into the Address Bar and enter a folder location, if desired. The Files and Folders listing shows the
contents of the Address Bar location that is currently selected.
If you are viewing the “Details” view of a folder location shown within the Address Bar then the
pu
details of the files and folders will be shown within columns. At the top of each column you will see a
Column Name that displays the type of information shown within that column.
If you want to search for a specific file or folder within a selected folder location you can use the
Search Box to accomplish this. Simply type the name of the file or folder or the first few letters in the name
n
of the file or folder into the Search Box to then search within the currently selected folder location for the text
that you enter. Searching begins immediately as you begin typing into the Search Box.
tio
2.2- Navigating Folders:
lua
You use File Explorer to navigate through the files and folders on your computer. Within the large
pane at the right side of File Explorer, you will see the contents of the currently selected drive or folder.
Within this pane at the right, you can double-click a drive or folder icon to open it. Windows will then display
its contents in the pane at the right side, showing you any folders and files within that selected location. You
va
can then repeat this process, moving through the folders within the computer to explore the files and folders
within your computer.
You can also use the hierarchical display pane at the left side of the File Explorer window to
e
navigate the drives and folders on your computer. Whatever item you select in the pane at the left side of
the File Explorer window will display its contents in the pane to the right. For example, you can click the
or
“This PC” icon shown within the left pane to display the libraries, media servers, and drives within your
computer in the pane to the right. In the left pane there is also a collapsible and expandable arrow shown at
the left of each icon. If needed, you can click the arrow to expand the containers shown next to the icon,
-f
which will then be displayed in a hierarchical listing beneath their parent container. For example, you can
click the arrow next to the “This PC” icon to show the libraries, media servers, and drives on your computer
ple
within the left pane if they are hidden. You can then select a drive in that listing within the left pane, such as
the “C:” drive, to display the folders within the computer’s hard drive in the pane to the right. Also note that
this drive icon has an arrow next to it within the left pane which you can click to collapse and expand the
folders within the drive in the left pane, as well.
m
To open a file shown in the right pane, simply double-click the file. Windows will then open the file
with whatever software program or app it thinks is best to open files of that type. If it doesn’t know what
program to use to open the file type, it will display a message window that will allow you to select the type of
Sa
program that you want Windows to use to attempt to open the selected file type.
To view information about a selected file within the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window
in Windows 8.1, you will need to click the “View” tab at the top of the window after selecting the file and
File Explorer
ly!
2.2- Navigating Folders- (cont'd.):
on
then click the “Details pane” button within the “Panes” button group at the left side of the tab. You can
choose to leave the display of this pane on or you can hide it again when you are finished viewing the file’s
properties by clicking the “Details pane” button again to hide its display.
es
Within File Explorer, if you display the contents of a folder in the pane at the right and then realize
that you are looking in the wrong folder, you can click the “Back” button in the toolbar below the Ribbon to
simply move back into the last folder that you viewed. You can then click the “Forward” button to move
os
forward again into the folder that you just left, if needed. If instead of moving back to the last viewed folder,
you would prefer to move up one folder level within the folder hierarchy, as shown in the pane at the left,
you can click the “Up” button to move up one folder level.
rp
2.3- Changing Folder Views:
pu
Windows allows you to change the display of the files and folders shown in the right pane within the
File Explorer window. This is just a matter of personal preference. Your options are to display folder items
as “Extra large icons,” “Large icons,” “Medium icons,” “Small icons,” “List,” “Details,” “Tiles,” or “Content” in
Windows 8.1. n
To change the view settings of the currently displayed folder within File Explorer in Windows 8.1,
tio
click the “View” tab within the Ribbon. Then click the desired view style button shown within the listing
displayed in the “Layout” button group. You can hold your mouse pointer over any view button listed to see
a preview of how it would appear in the window below. You can then click the choice that you prefer to apply
lua
it to the current folder.
2.4- Sorting Folder Contents:

va
Windows allows you to sort items within a folder. In Windows, you can sort the items that appear in
the right pane by any file or folder attributes that are available, regardless of the view style selected. To do
this in Windows 8.1, display the contents of the folder to sort within the right pane within the File Explorer.
e
Then click the “View” tab within the Ribbon. Then click the “Sort by” drop-down button within the “Current
view” button group on this tab. You can then select the attribute by which you want to sort the items shown
or
from the drop-down menu that appears. You can also click the button again and choose either the
“Ascending” or “Descending” choice within the menu to sort by the selected attribute in either ascending (a-
z, 0-9) or descending (z-a, 9-0) order.
-f
You can also sort the contents of a displayed folder by right-clicking into the blank area within the
folder to view a pop-up menu of choices. Roll your mouse pointer over the “Sort by” command to display a
side menu of attribute choices by which you can sort the folder’s contents. Click the desired attribute to sort
ple
the contents. You can also select either the “Ascending” or “Descending” choice within the side menu that
appears to sort by the selected attribute in either ascending (a-z, 0-9) or descending (z-a, 9-0) order.
If you are using the “Details” view of a folder’s content within the File Explorer window, you can also
easily sort the contents by using the column headings that appear within this view. To do this, simply click
m
the column heading by which you want to sort the contents within the folder. The items will be sorted by the
information within the column in either ascending order or descending order. Each time you click the same
Sa
column heading, it will reverse the sort order. The column that is used for sorting as well as its sort order will
be indicated by a small upward or downward pointing arrow within the column heading.
Note that File Explorer sorts folders separately from files when sorting folder content. For example, if

File Explorer
ly!
2.4- Sorting Folder Contents- (cont'd.):
on
you sort a folder’s content by “Name,” the folders and files will be sorted alphabetically by name within two
separate groupings within the view.
es
2.5- Selecting Files:
In order to perform many file management activities within File Explorer, you must first learn how to
os
select files. You can select a single file in File Explorer by clicking it once. It will then be highlighted. The
highlight indicates that the file is selected. When a file is selected, it has the focus of the Windows
application and any commands that you subsequently perform will be applied to the selected file only.
rp
To deselect a selection you have made, click into the blank or empty area within the right pane
shown in File Explorer.
pu
You can also select multiple files simultaneously. How you do this depends on how the files are
arranged within the right pane of the File Explorer window. If the files are non-adjacent, meaning not next to
each other, then select the first file within the window as normal. Then press and hold down the “Ctrl” key on
your keyboard while you click any other files you want to select, to select them as well as retain the
selection of the initially selected file. You can then release the “Ctrl” key after you have selected all of the
n
necessary files.
tio
If the files are adjacent, meaning that they are located next to each other, then you can click the first
file to select it. Then press and hold down the “Shift” key on your keyboard. Then click the last file that you
want to select. All of the files including and between the first and last files that you clicked should be
selected. You can then release the “Shift” key when finished.
lua
Another way to select adjacent files is to use a selection marquee. To do this, click and drag starting
in the blank area that is adjacent to the file or files that you want to select. As you click and drag with the
mouse pointer, you will see a light blue selection marquee appear. Continue to click and drag the selection
va
marquee over the files you want to select. Any file touched by the selection marquee will be selected within
the window. Release the mouse pointer once the files you desire have been selected.
You can also make use of the selection tools shown within the “Home” tab of the Ribbon in File
Explorer to make file and folder selections. You can click the “Select all” button in the “Select” button group
e
on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to select all items displayed in the right pane of the File Explorer window.
The keyboard shortcut to perform this same action is pressing “Ctrl” + “A” on your keyboard.
or
You can click the “Select none” button in the “Select” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon
to cancel any selections made within File Explorer. This corresponds to clicking into the empty or blank area
within a window.
-f
Finally, you can click the “Invert selection” button in the “Select” button group on the “Home” tab in
the Ribbon to invert your current selection. This selects all non-selected files and de-selects all selected
ple
files within a window.

m
Sa

File Explorer
ly!
2.6- Opening a File:
on
To open a file that is shown within the right pane of the File Explorer window, double-click the file.
Alternately, you can right-click the file to display a pop-up command menu. You can then click the “Open”
command within the pop-up menu to open the selected file.
es
Alternately, you can select a file within the right pane of the File Explorer window and then click the
“Open” or “Edit” buttons that appears within the “Open” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon to
open a selected file. Note that the “Edit” button will only appear active for editable files selected within the
os
window.
2.7- Reopening a Recently Opened Folder:
rp
Windows records the history of folders that you have recently opened. To reopen a recently opened
pu
folder, you can use File Explorer in Windows 8.1.
To view the recently opened folders on your computer, click the “Recent places” icon that appears
below the “Favorites” icon within the pane at the left side of the File Explorer window. The pane to the right
will then show folders that you have recently displayed in File Explorer.
n
tio
2.8- Creating a New Folder:
After you begin to create and save files, you may want to create additional folders and subfolders to
help you organize your saved materials. You can create a folder within almost any other folder on your
lua
computer’s hard drive. Sometimes you may also do this on shared network drives, assuming that you have
the required network permission to do so.
To create a new folder, first open the folder within which you want to create a subfolder in File
Explorer so that its contents are displayed in the pane at the right. Then click the “New folder” button within
va
the “New” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.

Windows will create a new folder within the right pane and highlight the name, which is “New folder,”
by default. You simply need to type the name that you want to give to the folder and then click outside of the
e
folder’s name box into the blank area of the window, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to set the
new folder’s name.
or
2.9- Renaming Files and Folders:

-f
You can rename files and folders you have created to reflect changes made to their contents or to
correct typos made when originally naming the files or folders. However, you should only rename files that
ple
you have created. Many of the files and folders in your computer are used by Windows applications and
renaming these could cause those programs to stop working. You could possibly even accidentally disable
Windows itself! However, if you are the creator of the file or folder, you can rest assured that you are free to
rename any files or folders you have created.
m
To rename a file or folder, select the file or folder to rename within File Explorer. Then click the
“Rename” button within the “Organize” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
Sa
Doing this will highlight the currently selected file or folder name and place a thin border around it.
Simply type the new name of the file into the name box, and then click outside of the name box into the
blank area within the window, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to set the new file or folder name.

File Explorer
ly!
2.10- Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Files and Folders:
on
Once you’ve decided to start organizing your files and folders, you will want to move or copy files
and folders to a new location. There is a difference between moving and copying files and folders. When
you move a file or folder, you cut the original item and then paste it into a different location on your
es
computer. When you copy a file or folder, you make an exact copy of the selected file or folder and then
paste the copy into a new location in your computer. When you move a file, it is often referred to as “cutting
and pasting.” When you copy a file, it is referred to as “copying and pasting.”
os
You can cut or copy and then paste files in several different ways. One way is to navigate to the file
or folder you want to cut or copy within File Explorer, so that you can see the icon for the file or folder you
want to move or copy in the pane at the right side of the window. To use this method, make sure you
change the File Explorer window’s size to “Restore” so it is not maximized. Now open a second File
rp
Explorer window by clicking the “File” tab within the original File Explorer window and then choosing the
“Open new window” command in the drop-down menu that appears. Use this window to navigate to the
pu
folder where you want to paste the item that you will copy or move from the first window. Once again,
ensure that this window is also using the “Restore” window size, and then place it next to the first window
onscreen. Then click and hold down on the file or folder from the first window, drag it into the second
window, and drop it there by releasing your mouse button. If the files are located on the same computer
n
drive then doing this will “cut and paste,” or move, the item. If they are on different computer drives, then
doing this will “copy and paste” the item. If you wanted to copy the item regardless of which drive the files
tio
are located within, then hold down the “Ctrl” key on your keyboard as you drag and drop the selected file or
folder. You will notice a small plus sign (+) appear next to your mouse pointer as you drag the item between
the windows. That icon indicates that the file or folder is being copied versus being cut.
lua
Another way to cut, copy, and paste is to click an item in a File Explorer window that you want to cut
or copy to select it. Then click either the “Copy” or “Cut” buttons, as desired, shown within the “Clipboard"
button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon. Then navigate to the folder into which you want to paste the
item that you just cut or copied by using File Explorer. You can use the same window, if desired. Then click
va
the “Paste” button within the “Clipboard" button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to paste the item.
Another way to cut, copy, and paste is to select the file or folder to cut or copy within the File
Explorer window. Then click either the “Move to” or “Copy to” buttons shown within the “Organize" button
e
group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon depending on whether you want to move or copy the selected item.
From the drop-down menu that appears, select the name of one of the recently accessed folders or libraries
to paste the item into the selected folder. You can also click the “Choose location…” command at the
or
bottom of either drop-down menu to open a “Move Items” or “Copy Items” window. Within this window, you
use the hierarchical folder navigation shown to select the destination folder into which you want the selected
-f
item to be moved or copied. You use this window to select a folder, just as you use the navigator in the
pane at the left side of File Explorer. Once you select the destination folder within this window, click either
the “Move” or “Copy” button that appears at the bottom of the “Move Item” or “Copy Item” window to move
ple
or copy the selected item and close the window.

A final way to cut, copy, and paste files and folders is by using the keyboard. To do this, first select
the item to copy or move within File Explorer and then press either the “Ctrl” + “C” keys on your keyboard to
copy the item or the “Ctrl” + “X” keys on your keyboard to cut the item. Then navigate into the folder where
m
you want to paste the item that you just selected. To then paste the item that you just cut or copied into the
selected folder, press the “Ctrl” + “V” keys on your keyboard. The paste command works the same way
Sa
regardless of whether the initially selected item was cut or copied.

File Explorer
ly!
2.11- Burning a CD or DVD:
on
Many computers have a CD or DVD drive that can create recordable CDs or DVDs so you can save
content from your computer onto removable media for transfer. To burn a CD or DVD, you must first insert a
blank, recordable CD or DVD into the corresponding drive in your computer.
es
After you do that, a small notification box appears in the upper-right corner of the screen telling you
to tap the notification box to determine what Windows 8.1 should do when a blank CD or DVD is inserted.
Once you tap or click the notification box, another message box will appear, showing you the actions that
os
your computer can take using the software programs that are available. Depending on the software and
apps that are available on your computer, you may have several choices appear within this window. In this
lesson, we will examine what will occur if you select the “Burn files to disc (using File Explorer)” command.
After selecting the “Burn files to disc (using File Explorer)” command, the “Burn a disc” window then
rp
appears. Start by typing a name for the disc into the “Disc title:” text box.
Next, select the type of recordable CD or DVD that you want to create by selecting the desired
pu
option button. You can select the “Like a USB flash drive” option button to format the disc to behave like a
removable drive to which you can add and erase files, like a USB drive does. Note that this disc may not
work on computers using versions of Windows prior to Windows XP, however. You can select the “With a
CD/DVD player” option button to create a standard, recordable disc that will play on most computers and
n
CD players. Once you have made your selection, click the “Next” button to continue.
If you selected the “Like a USB flash drive” choice, Windows will format the disc and then display it
tio
within a File Explorer window when it is finished formatting it. You can then use the disc as if it were any
other folder on your system. You can copy files to the disc and delete them when you are finished.
If you selected the “With a CD/DVD player” option, you will next view an empty File Explorer window
lua
into which you will need to copy the files and folders you want to burn to the CD or DVD. Then click the
“Burn to disc” button within the “Send” button group on the “Share” tab within the Ribbon to burn the
selected files to the disc.
va
2.12- Deleting Files:

e
Routinely deleting files you no longer need can help keep your files and folders better organized as
well as save space on your computer. However, before you delete a file you should be absolutely sure you
will no longer need it in the future.
or
To delete a file, use File Explorer to navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to delete.
Then select the file to delete within the right pane of the File Explorer window. Then press the “Delete” or
“Del” key on your keyboard to delete the selected files or folders. Alternately, you can click the “Delete”
-f
button in the “Organize" button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.
Windows will then display a warning prompt that asks if you are sure you want to send the file to the
ple
“Recycle Bin,” if you are deleting a file from your “C:” drive. Otherwise, it will ask if you want to permanently
delete the file. If you click “Yes,” Windows will then either place the file in the “Recycle Bin” or delete it
completely. Be sure to only delete files you created! If you delete a file that an application needs to run, you
will not be able to use the associated application. The application would need to be reinstalled.
m
Note you can click the drop-down arrow under the “Delete” button in the “Organize" button group on
the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to select other choices for file deletion. You can select the “Recycle”
command to move the item to the recycle bin or select the “Permanently delete” command to permanently
Sa
delete the file. Also, you can toggle the display of the warning prompt on or off by choosing the “Show
recycle confirmation” command. If checked, it will appear. If unchecked, it will not appear.

File Explorer
ly!
2.13- Managing Libraries in Windows 8.1:
on
Libraries are collections of folders that contain files of a selected type. The libraries you receive by
default in Windows 8.1 are “Documents,” “Music,” “Pictures,” and “Videos.” To view your libraries in
Windows 8.1, expand the “Favorites” section within the left pane of the File Explorer window, if needed.
es
Then click the “Desktop” within the left pane of the File Explorer window. Then double-click the “Libraries”
folder that appears in the right pane of the File Explorer window to view the libraries in your computer in the
right pane of the File Explorer window. These libraries contain different folders you commonly use to save
os
files of that type within your computer. That way, you can simply open the associated library folder to view
all of the subfolders and files within all of the folders associated with that library. You can add other folders
to these libraries to be able to search and back up the files within them using Windows. Note that subfolders
rp
contained within existing library folders are already considered part of the library, so you will not need to
add those to the definition of the library. However, you can add other folders in your computer to the
libraries if needed and perform other library management tasks using File Explorer. You can add a folder
pu
within your computer’s hard drive, a USB drive, or a connected network folder to your library as long as the
folder is capable of being indexed and the device, if external, is connected to your computer. You cannot
add a folder within a CD or DVD drive or any network-attached storage drives to a library. You also cannot
add individual files to a library, only folders.
n
To add a folder to a library, navigate to the folder that you want to add to the library using File
Explorer until you can see the folder displayed in the right pane. Then right-click the folder to add to the
tio
library and roll over the “Include in library” command in the pop-up menu that appears. Then click the name
of the library to which you want to add the selected folder within the side menu that appears.
You can also manage your libraries to remove folders from libraries and set the default folder into
lua
which to save items for each library. To manage your libraries in Windows 8.1, display the libraries in your
computer in the right pane of the File Explorer window. You can then click the library that you want to
manage in the right pane of the File Explorer window to select it. When you select a library, you will see the
new “Library Tools” contextual tab appear in the Ribbon. Click this tab to view the library management
va
options that you have.

You can click the “Manage Library” button in the “Manage” button group on the “Library Tools”
contextual tab in the Ribbon to open the “Library Locations” dialog box. This dialog box shows the names of
e
all of the folders that have been added to the selected library. You can remove a folder that you have added
to the library by clicking its name within this list and then clicking the “Remove” button to the right. You can
also add folders to this library by clicking the “Add…” button to the right to open an “Include Folder” dialog
or
box that will allow you to navigate to the folder to include. Then click it to select it within this dialog box and
then click the “Include folder” button to add that folder to the library.
-f
Also, within each library you will see one folder that is marked as “Public save location” and one
marked as “Default save location.” They may even be the same folder. The folder marked as the default
save location is where your computer will default to saving items of that library type when logged in using
ple
your current account. The folder marked as the public save location is where items of that library type will
default to being saved when someone is logged in using a “Guest” account. You can set which folder is the
default save and which is the public save within this dialog box. To do this, right-click the folder that you
want to set as a default save location for either choice and then select either the “Set as default save
m
location” or “Set as public save location” commands in the pop-up menu that appears. You can repeat the
process if you wish to set a single folder as the default for both if it is the default for neither. Note that these
Sa
commands will not appear if you right-click a folder that is already set as a default, as you must have a
default folder specified for both settings. Once you have finished managing your library, click the “OK”
button at the bottom of the “Library Locations” dialog box to apply your changes.

File Explorer
ly!
2.14- Managing the Computer and Drives in Windows 8.1:
on
You can also use File Explorer in Windows 8.1 to manage your computer and its hard drive. To do
this, click the “This PC” icon at the left side of File Explorer. To manage a selected hard drive in your
computer, then click the name of the hard drive to manage shown in the pane at the right side of the File
es
Explorer window.
You can click the “Computer” tab shown in the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window to
access buttons that allow you to perform computer and system management. Computer network buttons
os
are shown in the “Network” button group and system management buttons are shown within the “System"
button group.
In the “Network" button group on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon you can click the “Map network
drive” drop-down button to display a drop-down menu that allows you to create a network drive mapping or
rp
disconnect a mapped network drive. To create a network drive mapping, select the “Map network drive”
command in the drop-down menu. Then select a drive letter from the “Drive” drop-down and enter a network
pu
folder location into the “Folder” text box within the “Map Network Drive” dialog box that appears. Note that
you can click the “Browse…” button at the right end of the “Folder” text box to open a “Browse for Folder”
button that will simplify selecting a network folder. If you do this, select the network folder and then click the
“OK” button to add it to the “Folder” text box. After selecting a drive letter and entering a network folder
n
location, click the “Finish” button within the “Map Network Drive” dialog box to add the mapped network
drive.
tio
If you want to disconnect a mapped network drive, select the mapped network drive to remove within
the File Explorer window and then click the “Map network drive” drop-down button in the “Network" button
group on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon. Then choose the “Disconnect network drive” command to
lua
disconnect the selected network drive. If you did not select a mapped network drive prior to choosing this
command, then you will instead be presented with the “Disconnect Network Drives” dialog box where you
can select a network drive to disconnect and then click the “OK” button to disconnect the selected drive.
To add a shortcut to an FTP site or other network location, you can click the “Add a network
va
location” button to open the “Add network location” wizard. Here you can enter the necessary information to
access the desired network location and save it to your computer.
In the “System" button group on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon you can click the “Open Control
e
Panel” button to open the “Control Panel” for your computer. You can click the “Uninstall or change a
program” button to open the “Programs and Features” pane where you can manage the software installed
on your computer. You can click the “System properties” button to open the “System” pane that displays the
or
system information for your computer. You can click the “Manage” button to open the “Computer
Management” window in a separate window that allows you to manage the devices, hard drives, and other
-f
hardware settings of your computer.

If you select a hard drive within the right pane of the File Explorer window, you can click the
“Manage” tab within the “Drive Tools” contextual tab in the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window to
ple
display drive management buttons. You can click the “Optimize” button to optimize and defragment the
selected hard drive to ensure optimal performance. You can click the “Cleanup” button to run the “Disk
Cleanup” utility on the selected drive. This allows you to select temporary files to remove from the selected
drive to free more drive space.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
USING FILE EXPLORER:
on
1. You can start File Explorer as an app in Windows 8.1 by clicking the “File Explorer” app within the
“Apps” screen that you can access by clicking the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of
the Start screen to view all of the apps on your computer.
es
OR
os
1. You can access it from the Desktop by clicking the button for “File Explorer” that appears within the
Taskbar at the bottom of the screen.
2. The File Explorer window contains a set of tabs at the top of the window that allows you to perform
rp
many tasks and activities on the files and folders you select within the main File Explorer window.
3. The Navigation Pane shown at the left side of the File Explorer window is used to select folders, drives,
and navigate the computers, folders, and files on your network. You can expand and collapse the areas
pu
shown within the Navigation Pane, which include your Favorites, SkyDrive, Homegroup, This PC, and
Network.
4. You can use the Back, Forward, and Up Buttons to navigate within the different screens that you
browse within File Explorer. You can click the Back button to return to the last page viewed, the Forward
n
button to move forward again after pressing the Back button, and the Up button to move up a level
within the folder hierarchy shown within File Explorer.
tio
5. The various Tabs within the Ribbon are shown at the top of File Explorer. You will find all of your file
and folder management commands shown within the area.
6. When you select an item within the Files and Folders listing shown within File Explorer, the available
lua
commands will be shown on the tabs that comprise the Ribbon. You can click the tabs to see the
functions available within each group.
7. The Address Bar shows the currently selected location within your computer or network. You can also
click into the Address Bar and enter a folder location, if desired. The Files and Folders listing shows the
va
contents of the Address Bar location that is currently selected.

8. If you are viewing the “Details” view of a folder location shown within the Address Bar then the details of
the files and folders will be shown within columns. At the top of each column you will see a Column
e
Name that displays the type of information shown within that column.
9. If you want to search for a specific file or folder within a selected folder location you can use the Search
Box to accomplish this. Simply type the name of the file or folder or the first few letters in the name of
or
the file or folder into the Search Box to then search within the currently selected folder location for the
text that you enter. Searching begins immediately as you begin typing into the Search Box.
-f
NAVIGATING FOLDERS:
ple
1. Within the large pane at the right side of File Explorer, you will see the contents of the currently selected
drive or folder.
2. Within this pane at the right, you can double-click a drive or folder icon to open it. Windows will then
m
display its contents in the pane at the right side, showing you any folders and files within that selected
location.
Sa
3. You can then repeat this process, moving through the folders within the computer to explore the files
and folders within your computer.
(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
NAVIGATING FOLDERS- (CONT'D.):
on
4. You can also use the hierarchical display pane at the left side of the File Explorer window to navigate
the drives and folders on your computer. Whatever item you select in the pane at the left side of the File
Explorer window will display its contents in the pane to the right.
es
5. In the left pane there is also a collapsible and expandable arrow shown at the left of each icon. If
needed, you can click the arrow to expand the containers shown next to the icon, which will then be
displayed in a hierarchical listing beneath their parent container.
os
6. To open a file shown in the right pane, simply double-click the file. Windows will then open the file with
whatever software program or app it thinks is best to open files of that type. If it doesn’t know what
program to use to open the file type, it will display a message window that will allow you to select the
rp
type of program that you want Windows to use to attempt to open the selected file type.
7. To view information about a selected file within the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window in
Windows 8.1, you will need to click the “View” tab at the top of the window after selecting the file and
pu
then click the “Details pane” button within the “Panes” button group at the left side of the tab.
8. You can choose to leave the display of this pane on or you can hide it again when you are finished
viewing the file’s properties by clicking the “Details pane” button again to hide its display.
9. If you display the contents of a folder in the pane at the right and then realize that you are looking in the
n
wrong folder, you can click the “Back” button in the toolbar below the Ribbon to simply move back into
the last folder that you viewed.
tio
10. You can then click the “Forward” button to move forward again into the folder that you just left, if
needed.
11. If instead of moving back to the last viewed folder, you would prefer to move up one folder level within
lua
the folder hierarchy, as shown in the pane at the left, you can click the “Up” button to move up one folder
level.
va
CHANGING FOLDER VIEWS:
1. To change the view settings of the currently displayed folder within File Explorer in Windows 8.1, click
e
the “View” tab within the Ribbon.

2. Then click the desired view style button shown within the listing displayed in the “Layout” button group.
Your options are to display folder items as “Extra large icons,” “Large icons,” “Medium icons,” “Small
or
icons,” “List,” “Details,” “Tiles,” or “Content” in Windows 8.1.

3. You can hold your mouse pointer over any view button listed to see a preview of how it would appear in
-f
the window below.

4. You can then click the choice that you prefer to apply it to the current folder.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
SORTING FOLDERS:
on
1. Display the contents of the folder to sort within the right pane within the File Explorer.
2. Click the “View” tab within the Ribbon and then click the “Sort by” drop-down button within the “Current
view” button group on this tab.
es
3. Select the attribute by which you want to sort the items shown from the drop-down menu that appears.
4. You can also click the button again and choose either the “Ascending” or “Descending” choice within the
menu to sort by the selected attribute in either ascending (a-z, 0-9) or descending (z-a, 9-0) order.
os
5. You can also sort the contents of a displayed folder by right-clicking into the blank area within the folder
to view a pop-up menu of choices.
6. Roll your mouse pointer over the “Sort by” command to display a side menu of attribute choices by
which you can sort the folder’s contents.
rp
7. Click the desired attribute to sort the contents.
8. You can also select either the “Ascending” or “Descending” choice within the side menu that appears to
pu
sort by the selected attribute in either ascending (a-z, 0-9) or descending (z-a, 9-0) order.
9. If you are using the “Details” view of a folder’s content within the File Explorer window, you can also
easily sort the contents by using the column headings that appear within this view. To do this, click the
column heading by which you want to sort the contents within the folder. The items will be sorted by the
n
information within the column in either ascending order or descending order.
10. Each time you click the same column heading, it will reverse the sort order. The column that is used for
tio
sorting as well as its sort order will be indicated by a small upward or downward pointing arrow within
the column heading.
11. Note that File Explorer sorts folders separately from files when sorting folder content.
lua
OPENING A FILE:
va
1. To open a file that is shown within the right pane of the File Explorer window, double-click the file.
2. Alternately, you can right-click the file to display a pop-up command menu and then click the “Open”
command within the pop-up menu to open the selected file.
e
3. Alternately, you can select a file within the right pane of the File Explorer window and then click the
“Open” or “Edit” buttons that appears within the “Open” button group on the “Home” tab within the
Ribbon to open a selected file. Note that the “Edit” button will only appear active for editable files
or
selected within the window.

-f
OPENING A RECENTLY ACCESSED FOLDER:
1. lick the “Recent places” icon that appears below the “Favorites” icon within the pane at the left side of
ple
the File Explorer window.

2. The pane to the right will then show folders that you have recently displayed in File Explorer.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
CREATING A NEW FOLDER:
on
1. Open the folder within which you want to create a subfolder in File Explorer so that its contents are
displayed in the pane at the right.
2. Click the “New folder” button within the “New” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.
es
3. Windows will create a new folder within the right pane and highlight the name, which is “New folder,” by
default.
4. You simply need to type the name that you want to give to the folder and then click outside of the
os
folder’s name box into the blank area of the window, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to set
the new folder’s name.
rp
RENAMING FILES AND FOLDERS:
1. Select the file or folder to rename within File Explorer and then click the “Rename” button within the
pu
“Organize” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
2. Doing this will highlight the currently selected file or folder name and place a thin border around it.
3. Simply type the new name of the file into the name box, and then click outside of the name box into the
blank area within the window, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to set the new file or folder
n
name.
tio
CUTTING, COPYING, AND PASTING FILES AND FOLDERS:
lua
1. One way to cut or copy and then paste files is to navigate to the file or folder you want to cut or copy
within File Explorer, so you can see the icon for the file or folder to move or copy in the pane at the right
side of the window. Ensure the File Explorer window’s size is set to “Restore” so it is not maximized.
2. Open a second File Explorer window by clicking the “File” tab within the original File Explorer window
va
and then choosing the “Open new window” command in the drop-down menu that appears.
3. Use this window to navigate to the folder where you want to paste the item that you will copy or move
from the first window. Once again, ensure that this window is also using the “Restore” window size, and
e
then place it next to the first window onscreen.

4. Then click and hold down on the file or folder from the first window, drag it into the second window, and
or
drop it there by releasing your mouse button.

5. If the files are located on the same computer drive then doing this will “cut and paste,” or move, the item.
If they are on different computer drives, then doing this will “copy and paste” the item. To copy the item
-f
regardless of which drive the files are located within, hold down the “Ctrl” key on your keyboard as you
drag and drop the selected file or folder. You will notice a small plus sign (+) appear next to your mouse
pointer as you drag the item between the windows that indicates that the file or folder is being copied
ple
versus being cut.
OR
m
1. Another way to cut, copy, and paste is to click an item in a File Explorer window that you want to cut or
copy to select it.
Sa
2. Then click either the “Copy” or “Cut” buttons, as desired, shown within the “Clipboard" button group on
the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.
(cont’d.)
ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
CUTTING, COPYING, AND PASTING FILES AND FOLDERS- (CONT’D.):
on
3. Navigate to the folder into which you want to paste the item that you just cut or copied by using File
Explorer. You can use the same window, if desired.
4. Click the “Paste” button within the “Clipboard" button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to paste the
es
item.
OR
os
1. Another way to cut, copy, and paste is to select the file or folder to cut or copy within the File Explorer
window.
2. Click either the “Move to” or “Copy to” buttons shown within the “Organize" button group on the “Home”
rp
tab in the Ribbon depending on whether you want to move or copy the selected item.
3. From the drop-down menu that appears, select the name of one of the recently accessed folders or
pu
libraries to paste the item into the selected folder.
4. You can also click the “Choose location…” command at the bottom of either drop-down menu to open a
“Move Items” or “Copy Items” window.
5. Within this window, you use the hierarchical folder navigation shown to select the destination folder into
n
which you want the selected item to be moved or copied. You use this window to select a folder, just as
you use the navigator in the pane at the left side of File Explorer.
tio
6. Once you select the destination folder within this window, click either the “Move” or “Copy” button that
appears at the bottom of the “Move Item” or “Copy Item” window to move or copy the selected item and
close the window.
lua
OR
1. To cut, copy, and paste files and folders by using the keyboard, first select the item to copy or move
va
within File Explorer and then press either the “Ctrl” + “C” keys on your keyboard to copy the item or the
“Ctrl” + “X” keys on your keyboard to cut the item.
2. Navigate into the folder where you want to paste the item that you just selected.
e
3. To then paste the item that you just cut or copied into the selected folder, press the “Ctrl” + “V” keys on
your keyboard.
or
BURNING A CD OR DVD:
-f
1. Insert a blank, recordable CD or DVD into the corresponding drive in your computer.
2. Tap or click the small notification box that appears in the upper-right corner of the screen to determine
ple
what Windows 8.1 should do when a blank CD or DVD is inserted.

3. Another message box will appear, showing you the actions that your computer can take using the
software programs that are available. Select the “Burn files to disc (using File Explorer)” command.
4. After selecting the “Burn files to disc (using File Explorer)” command, the “Burn a disc” window then
m
appears. Start by typing a name for the disc into the “Disc title:” text box.
5. Select the type of recordable CD or DVD that you want to create by selecting the desired option button.
You can select the “Like a USB flash drive” option button to format the disc to behave like a removable
Sa
drive to which you can add and erase files, like a USB drive does.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
BURNING A CD OR DVD- (CONT’D.):
on
6. You can select the “With a CD/DVD player” option button to create a standard, recordable disc that will
play on most computers and CD players.
7. Once you have made your selection, click the “Next” button to continue.
es
8. If you selected the “Like a USB flash drive” choice, Windows will format the disc and then display it
within a File Explorer window when it is finished formatting it. You can then use the disc as if it were any
other folder on your system. You can copy files to the disc and delete them when you are finished.
os
9. If you selected the “With a CD/DVD player” option, you will next view an empty File Explorer window
into which you will need to copy the files and folders you want to burn to the CD or DVD.
10. Then click the “Burn to disc” button within the “Send” button group on the “Share” tab within the Ribbon
rp
to burn the selected files to the disc.
DELETING FILES:
pu
1. Use File Explorer to navigate to the folder that contains the file you want to delete.
2. Select the file to delete within the right pane of the File Explorer window.
3. Press the “Delete” or “Del” key on your keyboard to delete the selected files or folders.
n
tio
OR
3. Click the “Delete” button in the “Organize" button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.
lua
4. Windows will then display a warning prompt that asks if you are sure you want to send the file to the
“Recycle Bin,” if you are deleting a file from your “C:” drive. Otherwise, it will ask if you want to
permanently delete the file. If you click “Yes,” Windows will then either place the file in the “Recycle Bin”
or delete it completely.
5. You can click the drop-down arrow under the “Delete” button in the “Organize" button group on the
va
“Home” tab in the Ribbon to select other choices for file deletion. You can select the “Recycle”
command to move the item to the recycle bin or select the “Permanently delete” command to
permanently delete the file. You can toggle the display of the warning prompt on or off by choosing the
e
“Show recycle confirmation” command. If checked, it will appear. If unchecked, it will not appear.
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
MANAGING LIBRARIES IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. To view your libraries in Windows 8.1, expand the “Favorites” section within the left pane of the File
Explorer window, if needed.
2. Click the “Desktop” within the left pane of the File Explorer window.
es
3. Double-click the “Libraries” folder that appears in the right pane of the File Explorer window to view the
libraries in your computer in the right pane of the File Explorer window.
4. To add a folder to a library, navigate to the folder that you want to add to the library using File Explorer
os
until you can see the folder displayed in the right pane.
5. Right-click the folder to add to the library and roll over the “Include in library” command in the pop-up
menu that appears.
rp
6. Click the name of the library to which you want to add the selected folder within the side menu that
appears.
7. To manage your libraries in Windows 8.1, display the libraries in your computer in the right pane of
pu
the File Explorer window.
8. Click the library that you want to manage in the right pane of the File Explorer window to select it.
9. After you select a library, click the new “Library Tools” contextual tab n the Ribbon to view the library
management options that you have.
n
10. You can click the “Manage Library” button in the “Manage” button group on the “Library Tools”
contextual tab in the Ribbon to open the “Library Locations” dialog box. This dialog box shows the
tio
names of all of the folders that have been added to the selected library.
11. To remove a folder you have added to a library, click its name within this list and then click the
“Remove” button to the right.
lua
12. You can also add folders to this library by clicking the “Add…” button to the right to open an “Include
Folder” dialog box that will allow you to navigate to the folder to include.
13. Then click it to select it within this dialog box and then click the “Include folder” button to add that folder
to the library.
va
14. To set which folder is the default save and which is the public save within this dialog box, right-
click the folder that you want to set as a default save location for either choice and then select either the
“Set as default save location” or “Set as public save location” commands in the pop-up menu that
e
appears.
15. You can repeat the process if you wish to set a single folder as the default for both if it is the default for
neither. Note that these commands will not appear if you right-click a folder that is already set as a
or
default, as you must have a default folder specified for both settings.
16. Once you have finished managing your library, click the “OK” button at the bottom of the “Library
-f
Locations” dialog box to apply your changes.

ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
File Explorer
ly!
MANAGING THE COMPUTER AND DISKS IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. Click the “This PC” icon at the left side of File Explorer.
2. To manage a selected hard drive in your computer, click the name of the hard drive to manage shown in
the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window.
es
3. You can click the “Computer” tab shown in the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window to access
buttons that allow you to perform computer and system management. Computer network buttons are
shown in the “Network” button group and system management buttons are shown within the “System"
os
button group.
4. In the “Network" button group on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon you can click the “Map network drive”
drop-down button to display a drop-down menu that allows you to create a network drive mapping or
rp
disconnect a mapped network drive.
5. To create a network drive mapping, select the “Map network drive” command in the drop-down menu.
6. Select a drive letter from the “Drive” drop-down and enter a network folder location into the “Folder” text
pu
box within the “Map Network Drive” dialog box that appears.
7. Note that you can click the “Browse…” button at the right end of the “Folder” text box to open a “Browse
for Folder” button that will simplify selecting a network folder. If you do this, select the network folder and
then click the “OK” button to add it to the “Folder” text box.
n
8. After selecting a drive letter and entering a network folder location, click the “Finish” button within the
“Map Network Drive” dialog box to add the mapped network drive.
tio
9. To disconnect a mapped network drive, select the mapped network drive to remove within the File
Explorer window and then click the “Map network drive” drop-down button in the “Network" button group
on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon.
lua
10. Then choose the “Disconnect network drive” command to disconnect the selected network drive.
11. If you did not select a mapped network drive prior to choosing this command, then you will instead be
presented with the “Disconnect Network Drives” dialog box where you can select a network drive to
disconnect and then click the “OK” button to disconnect the selected drive.
va
12. To add a shortcut to an FTP site or other network location, you can click the “Add a network location”
button to open the “Add network location” wizard.
13. Here you can enter the necessary information to access the desired network location and save it to your
e
computer.
14. In the “System" button group on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon you can click the “Open Control
Panel” button to open the “Control Panel” for your computer.
or
15. You can click the “Uninstall or change a program” button to open the “Programs and Features” pane
where you can manage the software installed on your computer.
-f
16. You can click the “System properties” button to open the “System” pane that displays the system
information for your computer.
17. You can click the “Manage” button to open the “Computer Management” window in a separate window
ple
that allows you to manage the devices, hard drives, and other hardware settings of your computer.
18. If you select a hard drive within the right pane of the File Explorer window, you can click the “Manage”
tab within the “Drive Tools” contextual tab in the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window to display
drive management buttons.
m
19. You can click the “Optimize” button to optimize and defragment the selected hard drive to ensure
optimal performance.
Sa
20. You can click the “Cleanup” button to run the “Disk Cleanup” utility on the selected drive. This allows
you to select temporary files to remove from the selected drive to free more drive space.

EXERCISES-
File Explorer
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To be able to use File Explorer to navigate through the folders in your computer.
Exercises:
es
1. Click the “Desktop” app within the Start screen to open the Desktop.
2. Click the “File Explorer” button shown within the Taskbar towards the lower left corner of the screen
os
to open the File Explorer window.
3. At the left side of the File Explorer window, click the “This PC” icon.
4. You will see the contents of your PC displayed in the “Folders,” “Devices and drives” and possibly
rp
“Network locations” sections at the right side of the File Explorer window.
5. Double-click the “(C:)” drive in the “Devices and drives” section that is displayed in the pane at the
right side of the window to display the contents of your computer’s “C:” drive in the pane at the right
pu
side of the File Explorer window.
6. Double-click the “Users” folder icon in the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window to
display the folders of the computer’s users in the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window.
7. Double-click the “Public” folder icon in the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window to
n
display the “Public” user’s folders in the pane at the right side of the File Explorer window.
tio
8. Click the “Back” button shown within the “Back, Forward, and Up” button group in the File Explorer
window to go back to the “Users” folder that you were just viewing.
9. Click the “Up” button shown within the “Back, Forward, and Up” button group in the File Explorer
window to move up one level within the folder hierarchy to the “C:” drive.
lua
10. Click the “Documents” library icon under the “This PC” icon within the “Navigation Bar” at the left
side of the File Explorer window to display the contents of the “Documents” library in the pane at the
right side of the File Explorer window.
Close the File Explorer window by clicking the red “X” button in the upper-right corner of the File
va
11.
Explorer window.
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 3-
Windows 8.1 Settings
ly!
on
3.1- Accessing Settings in Windows 8.1
3.2- The “PC and devices” Settings
es
3.3- The “Accounts” Settings
os
3.4- The “SkyDrive” Settings
rp
3.5- The “Search and apps” Settings
pu
3.6- The “Privacy” Settings
3.7- The “Network” Settings

n
tio
3.8- The “Time and language” Settings
lua
3.9- The “Ease of Access” Settings

va
3.10- The “Update and recovery” Settings

e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
3.1- Accessing Settings in Windows 8.1:
on
You can access the settings in Windows 8.1 by clicking the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar.
To show the settings for the currently displayed app on your computer, roll your pointer to the upper-right or
lower-right corners of the Windows 8.1 screen until the Charm Bar appears. Then roll your pointer over the
es
Charm Bar until it appears solid. You can also open it by swiping in from the right edge of a touch screen, or
by simply pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard. Then click the “Settings” button within the
Charm Bar to display the settings for the currently displayed app in a pane at the right side of the window.
os
At the top of the “Settings” pane you can click the links shown to access settings for the currently
displayed app within Windows 8.1. For example, if viewing the Start screen settings, then these commands
are “Personalize,” “Tiles” and “Help.” However, if viewing the Desktop settings, then these choices are
“Control Panel,” Personalization,” “PC info” and “Help.” You will see the name of the currently displayed app
rp
followed by the different settings available for that app at the top of the “Settings” pane.
At the bottom of the pane you will see icons that represent general computer settings. These include
pu
the internet connection, audio, display settings, notification settings, power settings, and default language.
At the very bottom of the pane, you can click the “Change PC settings” command to display all of your
available computer settings in a full-screen app window. If you simply want to hide the “Settings” pane
without making any changes, click back into the middle of the screen again to hide the “Settings” pane.
n
If you click the “Change PC settings” command at the bottom of the “Settings” pane, you will see the
“PC settings” app window appear. Here you can adjust your computer’s settings to customize your Windows
tio
8.1 experience. Within this window, you can click the categories shown at the left side to change the various
settings within that category to the right. The categories shown for laptop and desktop devices include “PC
and devices,” “Accounts,” “SkyDrive,” “Search and apps,” “Privacy,” “Network,” “Time and language,” “Ease
lua
of Access,” and “Update and recovery.” In the pane at the right side of the “PC settings” window you can
see basic personalization options shown and you can click the “View recently used settings” command to
display recently accessed settings here so that you won’t need to find those settings again within the setting
categories to change a recently changed setting again. In the lessons within this chapter, we will discuss
va
changing these settings within the setting categories to customize your Windows 8.1 experience.
When you have finished changing any settings that you want to set within the “PC settings” app and
want to close the “PC settings” app, click and hold down or tap and hold down at the top of the app window
e
and then drag the application to the bottom of the screen to close the “PC settings” app window.
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
3.2- The “PC and Devices” Settings:
on
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “PC and devices” command
at the left side of the screen to display personalization and management options for your PC and its
attached devices within this app window. Within this window, the categories of settings are listed in the pane
es
at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this listing to change their individual
settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the
“PC and settings” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC settings” window. This lesson
os
will examine the settings you can change within the “PC and devices” settings category.
If you click the “Lock screen” category at the left side of the window, you will see a picture of your
current lock screen shown in the “Lock screen preview” section to the right. The lock screen is the screen
rp
that is shown when you have locked your account or signed out of Windows 8.1. You can select a new lock
screen picture by selecting one of the choices shown below the current lock screen or you can click the
“Browse” button to display the picture files on your computer within a “Files” window where you can click
pu
your choice to select it and then click the “Choose image” button. You can also click the “Cancel” button
within the “Files” screen to return to the “PC settings” window without making a picture selection.
If you want to instead play a slide show as your lock screen, click the “Play a slide show” toggle
button to set it to the “On” position. To turn off the slide show and use a selected picture again, just click this
n
same toggle button to set it to the “Off” position. If you have slides shows turned “on,” then in the “Use
pictures from” section you will see the folder within which Windows 8.1 will take the photos that will be used
tio
for the slide show. It defaults to using the “Pictures” within the SkyDrive folder and the “Pictures” within the
“Pictures” library. You can remove any of these folders by clicking the folder and then clicking the “Remove”
button that appears. You can add a custom folder to the slide show by clicking the “Add folder” button to
lua
open a “Files” window where you can navigate into the folder you want to add and then click the “Choose
this folder” button to add the folder you are within to the slide show. You can also click the “Cancel” button to
cancel folder selection, if desired.
Back in the “Lock screen preview” section you can then click the settings buttons shown to toggle
va
each of the following features of the slide show to either the “On” or “Off” positions: “Include Camera Roll
folders from this PC and SkyDrive,” “Only use pictures that will best fit on my screen,” Play a slide show
when using battery power,” and “When my PC is inactive, show the lock screen instead of turning off the
e
screen.” You can then use the “Turn off screen after slide show has played for” drop-down to set the
duration of time to play the slide show before turning of the display.
Below the “Lock screen preview” section you can see the “Lock screen apps” section. Here you
or
select which apps that you have installed will be allowed to run in the background when the lock screen is
shown to show quick status updates and notifications. To add an app to the existing choices, click any of the
-f
small plus signs shown in this area to then select the app whose information you want to display from the
pop-up menu that appears. You can also click an existing app tile shown here and then select the “Don’t
show quick status here” command from the pop-up menu to remove an app. You can also select a different
ple
app to substitute for the selected app from the pop-up menu that is shown, if you prefer.
You can select a single app for which you want to show detailed status updates by clicking the app
icon under the “Choose an app to display detailed status” section and then choosing your desired app from
the pop-up menu shown.
m
You can select a single app from which to show alarms by clicking the small app icon under the
“Choose an app to show alarms” section and then selecting the name of the app to use from the pop-up
Sa
menu that appears.

You can enable the use of the camera on your PC when in the lock screen by clicking the “Swipe
down on the lock screen to use the camera” option button to set it to the “On” position. You can then use the

ly!
3.2- The “PC and Devices” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
camera when in the lock screen by swiping down on the lock screen itself.
You can click the “Display” category in the pane at the left side of the window to show display
customization settings in the area to the right. Under the “Customize your display” section you will see any
es
connected monitors shown in a numbered diagram. You can change the display settings of a monitor shown
here by clicking it. You can click the “Identify” command below the diagram to display the number of each
monitor onscreen so that you can tell which monitor is which, if needed. After connecting an external
os
display, you can click the “Detect” command below the diagram to detect the secondary display.
You can change the screen resolution of a selected monitor by clicking and dragging the
“Resolution” slider to the left or right. The current screen resolution for the selected monitor will be shown
above the slider. You can then use the “Orientation” drop-down to select a screen orientation, if needed. To
rp
then apply your changes, click the “Apply” button. You can cancel any changes by clicking the “Cancel”
button.
pu
In the “More options” section you can use the drop-down to select a size for apps, text, and other
items for monitors that can support it, if desired. If you need to connect to a wireless display, you can click
the “Connect to a wireless display” command to open the “Project” pane at the far right side of the window
which you can use to select a second display or click the “Add a wireless display” command to switch the
n
window to the “Devices” setting category and begin the search for a wireless display.
You can click the “Devices” category at the left side of the window to display your devices settings in
tio
the area to the right. If you have connected a device and Windows 8.1 does not automatically recognize it,
you can click the “Add a device” button in the “Add devices” section to have Windows 8.1 attempt to
automatically search for and install the device. In the “Printers” section below that, you will see a listing of
lua
the available printing devices for your computer. To remove a printer from this list, you can click the name of
the printer and then click the “Remove device” button that appears. Note that you cannot manage printer
settings from this window. If there are other types of devices connected, you can see them within the “Other
devices” category. Just as with the printers, you can click the name of a device shown in this listing and then
va
click the “Remove device” button that appears to remove a selected device, if needed. It is recommended
that you leave the “Download over metered connections” option set to the “Off” position so that you will not
download device software over a metered connection. However, if a metered internet connection is your
e
only connection option, you may consider turning this “On,” if needed. If you want to save music, pictures,
and video to an external removable drive by default, you can connect the external hard drive and then click
the “Set up” button under the “Default save locations” section to choose into which folders on the external
or
hard drive you want to save those types of items by default.

You can click the “Mouse and touchpad” category at the left side of the screen to view mouse and
-f
touchpad settings in the area to the right. Under the “Mouse” section you can use the two drop-downs to
select which mouse button is your primary mouse button and what you want to have happen when you roll
the mouse wheel. If you choose the “Multiple lines at a time” choice from the second drop-down you can use
ple
the slider underneath it to set the number of lines to scroll when you roll your mouse wheel. Under the
“Touchpad” section, you can use the drop-down to set the amount of delay before clicks to the touchpad will
be recognized. A longer setting makes the touchpad less responsive to accidental touching.
You can click the “Typing” category at the left to display typing settings in the area to the right. Here
m
you can click the “Autocorrect misspelled words” and “Highlight misspelled words” options to turn them “On”
or “Off.” They are both set to the “On” position by default.
Sa
You can click the “Corners and edges” category to display settings that allow you to control the
swiping and corner behaviors of Windows 8.1 in the area to the right. Here you can click the switches shown
to turn the settings either “On” or “Off.” The settings under the “App switching” section are “Allow switching

ly!
3.2- The “PC and Devices” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
between recent apps” and “When I swipe in from the left edge, switch between my recent apps instead of
showing a list of them.” Under the “Corner navigation section,” the settings are “When I point to the upper-
right corner, show the charms” and “When I click the upper-left corner, switch between my recent apps.”
es
Note that these are all set to “On” by default. You can click the “Clear list” button that appears within the
“App switching” section to clear the list of recent apps, if desired.
You can click the “Power and sleep” category at the left side of this window to display the power
os
settings for your monitor and computer in the area to the right. You can select an increment of time from the
four drop-down settings to set the amount of time you want to elapse before that setting is applied. In the
“Screen” section, the settings are “On battery power, turn off after” and “When plugged in, turn off after.” In
the “Sleep” section, the settings are “On battery power, PC goes to sleep after” and “When plugged in, PC
rp
goes to sleep after.
You can click the “AutoPlay” category at the left side of the window to set your AutoPlay preferences
pu
in the area to the right. AutoPlay is a feature that determines what action Windows 8.1 will take when you
insert or connect media or devices to your computer. To enable AutoPlay for all media and devices, ensure
that the “Use AutoPlay for all media and devices” option is set to “On.” You can click it to turn it “Off,” if
needed. In the “Choose AutoPlay Defaults” section, you can use the “Removable drive” and “Memory card”
n
drop-downs to set a default action to take when a device of that type is connected, if desired.
Finally, you can click the “PC info” category at the left side of this window to view basic information
tio
about your computer in the screen to the right. Here you can see several settings, including your “PC
name,” “Processor,” “Installed RAM,” and “System type.” You can also view information about your version
of Windows under the “Windows” section. You can see the name of your computer’s manufacturer under the
lua
“Support” section and click the Online support” hyperlink to open a web page for hardware support from
your manufacturer.
va
3.3- The “Accounts” Settings:
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Accounts” category at the
e
left side of the screen to display user management settings in this window. Within this window, the
categories of settings are listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories
shown in this listing to change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can
or
click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Accounts” title at the left side of the window to return to the
main “PC settings” window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change within the “Accounts”
-f
settings category.
You can click the “Your account” category at the left side of this window to view settings for your user
account in the area to the right. Your name and the e-mail account associated with your Microsoft user
ple
account will be show at the top of the window. You can click the “More account settings online” hyperlink to
open a web page that will allow you to manage more settings for your Microsoft user account online.
In the “Account picture” section you will see your current Microsoft user account picture. You can
click the “Browse” button to open the “Files” window where you can select another image to use, if desired.
m
Select an image and click the “Choose image” button to use the selected image as your account picture.
You can click the “Cancel” button if you decide not to select an account picture. In the “Create an account
picture” section, if you have an app installed that you can use to create an account picture, you can select
Sa
the desired app under the “Create an account picture” section to use the selected app to create your
account picture.

ly!
3.3- The “Accounts” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
You can click the “Sign-in options” category at the left side of the screen to see the available security
and sign-in options that you can set in the area to the right. You can change your password to login by
clicking the “Change” button in the “Password” section and then following the onscreen prompts to reset
es
your login password. For touch screen devices, such as a tablet PC, you can click the “Add” button in the
“Picture password” section and then follow the onscreen prompts to create a picture that you must click in
specific areas to login to a touch screen computing device. You can click the “Add” button in the “PIN”
os
section and then follow the onscreen prompts to create four-digit PIN number that can also be used to allow
access to touch screen devices in conjunction with a picture password for added security. You can also
change whether or not you need to re-enter your password when waking this computer from its sleep mode
by clicking the “Change” button in the “Password policy” section.
rp
You can click the “Other accounts” category at the left side of the screen to manage other user
accounts on this computer in the area to the right if you are signed-in with a user account that is set up as
pu
an “Administrator” user account on this computer. To create a new user account, click the “Add an account”
button and then follow the onscreen prompts to create a new user account. If you have other accounts that
you want to remove or manage, click the name of the account to manage and then click the “Edit” button to
change the local account type settings of the account (“Standard,” “Administrator,” or “Child”) in the
n
onscreen prompts that appears or click the “Remove” button to remove that account from your computer.
You can click the “Set up an account for assigned access” command to select and account and an app to
tio
use for assigned access. With assigned access the user can only access one app, downloaded from the
Windows Store, that you select. Follow the onscreen prompts to select the account and the app to use.
lua
3.4- The “SkyDrive” Settings:
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “SkyDrive” category at the left
va
side of the screen to display remote storage settings in SkyDrive within this window. The categories of
settings are listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this
listing to change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back”
e
arrow that appears next to the “SkyDrive” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC
settings” window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change within the “SkyDrive” settings
category.
or
You can click the “File storage” category at the left side of this window to view remote file storage
settings in the area to the right. The amount of remote storage and the space used are displayed in the
“SkyDrive storage” section. If you would like to buy more storage space, you can click the Buy more
-f
storage” button to open a page where you can make that transaction. To save your documents to the
SkyDrive by default, ensure that the “Save documents to SkyDrive by default” switch is set to the “On”
ple
position. If you want to save documents locally by default, you can click the switch to set it to the “Off”
position. You can click the “See my files on SkyDrive” link to open the “SkyDrive” app and see the contents
of your SkyDrive folders within the app window.
You can click the “Camera roll” category at the left side of the window to view SkyDrive settings for
m
your “Camera roll” folder at the right side of the window. The “Camera Roll” folder is a subfolder within your
“Pictures” folder that is created the first time that you use the “Camera” app within Windows 8.1. In the
“Upload photos and video” section, choose the option button that corresponds to your preference for
Sa
uploading pictures to SkyDrive from your “Camera Roll” folder. If you want to automatically upload videos to
SkyDrive, you can click the “Automatically upload videos to SkyDrive” switch to toggle it to the “On” position.

ly!
3.4- The “SkyDrive” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
You can click the “Sync settings” category at the left side of the window to view the synchronization
options for your user account on this computer at the right side of the window. Normally, when you log-in to
any Windows 8.1 device with your user account, the settings will be synchronized so that all of your settings
es
and apps will be available to you on that device. However, you can change these synchronization settings
on this computer if you want by changing the settings within this section. In the area to the right you will see
a series of toggles switches that you can click to switch them to the “Off” position, if desired, to disable the
os
setting. By default, all of these switches are set to the “On” position. In the “Sync settings with SkyDrive”
section you can choose whether or not to sync your settings on this PC. Under the “Personalization” section,
the settings are “Start screen,” “Appearance,” and “Desktop personalization.” Under the “App settings”
section, the settings are “Apps” and “App data.” Under the “Other settings” section, the settings are “Web
rp
browser,” “Passwords,” “Language preferences,” “Ease of Access,” and “Other Windows settings.” Under
the “Back up settings” section, you can choose whether or not to save these settings for this PC to the
pu
SkyDrive so you can restore them if needed.
You can click the “Metered connections” category at the left side of the window to view settings that
determine how you use SkyDrive over a metered internet connection at the right side of the window. In the
area to the right you will see a series of toggles switches that you can click to switch them either “On” or
n
“Off” to enable or disable the setting. The settings under the “Use SkyDrive over metered connections”
section are “Upload and download files over metered connections” and “Upload and download files over
tio
metered connections even when I’m roaming.” The settings under the “Sync settings” section are “Sync and
backup settings over metered connections” and “Sync and backup settings over metered connections even
when I’m roaming.”
lua
3.5- The “Search and apps” Settings:

va
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Search and apps” category
at the left side of the screen to display search and other app settings within this window. The categories of
settings are listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this
e
listing to change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back”
arrow that appears next to the “Search and apps” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC
settings” window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change within the “Search and apps”
or
settings category.
You can click the “Search” category at the left side of this window to view settings for the “Search”
app and the “Search” pane within the Charm Bar in the area to the right. In the “Search history” section you
-f
can click the “Clear” button to clear your search history. You can click the “Manage my Microsoft advertising
and other personalization info” command to open a web page that will allow you to sign-in with your
ple
Microsoft user account to set your advertising and other personal preferences for your account.
Under the “Use Bing to search online” section you can click the switch to enable or disable the use
of Bing to display the results of web searches. If disabled, the remaining options within this page are
inaccessible. Under the “Your search experience” section, choose the option button that corresponds to the
m
level of personalization you want your web search results to use. Under the “SafeSearch” section, choose
the option button that corresponds to the level of content filtering of web results you want Bing to use. In the
“Metered connections” section, you can click the toggle switches to enable or disable the settings shown by
Sa
turning them “On” or “Off.” The settings are “Get search suggestions and web results from Bing over
metered connections” and “Get search suggestions and web results from Bing over metered connections

ly!
3.5- The “Search and apps” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
even when I’m roaming.” You can click the “Privacy statement” hyperlink to open a web page to view the
Windows 8.1 privacy statement, if desired.
You can click the “Share” category at the left side of this window to view app sharing settings in the
es
area to the right. Under the “Sharing options” section you can click the switches for the two settings shown
to toggle the options “On” or “Off.” The settings shown are “Show apps I use most often at the top of the
apps list” and “Show a list of how I share most often.” If you enable the second option, then choose the
os
number of items to display in that list from the “Items in list” drop-down menu. You can also click the “Clear
list” button to clear the list of most used apps. Under the “Use these apps to share” section you can enable
or disable the use of the listed app for sharing by clicking the toggle switch button next to each app to turn it
“On” or “Off.”
rp
You can click the “Notifications” category at the left side of this window to view app notification
settings in the area to the right. Under the “Notifications” section, you can click the toggle switch to turn it
pu
“On” or “Off” to enable or disable each setting shown. The settings are “Show app notifications,” “Show app
notifications on the lock screen,” “Play notification sounds” and “Turn on my screen when I get a call.”
Under the “Quiet hours” section, you can enable a duration of time when you will not receive
notifications from apps by turning the “Quiet hours” setting to the “On” position. You can click the switch to
n
toggle quiet hours “Off,” if you prefer. If enabled, you can then choose which hours will be the quiet hours by
selecting a starting and ending time using the drop-downs under the “From” and “To” sections. If you want to
tio
receive calls during the quiet hours then ensure that the “Receive calls during quiet hours” switch is set to
the “On” position. You can disable calls during this time by clicking the switch to turn it to the “Off” position.
Under the “Show notifications from these apps” section, you can decide from which apps you want to
lua
receive notifications. For each app listed, you can click its toggle switch to toggle notifications from each app
“On” or “Off.”
You can click the “App sizes” category at the left side of this window to view app the sizes of apps
that are installed and to uninstall apps you do not want in the area to the right. You can click an app within
va
this list and then click the “Uninstall” button that appears to uninstall the app from your computer.
You can click the “Defaults” category at the left side of this window to view settings that determine
which app is set to be used by default to perform tasks in Windows 8.1 in the area to the right. Under the
e
“Choose default apps” section you can click the app tile shown to select the name of the app that you want
to use for each activity by default from a pop-up menu of app choices that appears. If no default app has
been set, click the “Choose a default” button to select a default app from the same pop-up menu of apps
or
that appears. For advanced users, you can select which app to use by default by associating a default app
with a file extension or protocol.
-f
To associate an app by file extension, click the “Choose default apps by file type” command. You
can then scroll through the listing of file types shown and then click the button under the “Default app”
column for the desired file type to set a default app to open that type of file. When you are finished, click the
ple
“Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Defaults” settings category.
To associate an app by protocol, click the “Choose default apps by protocol” command. You can
then scroll through the listing of protocols shown and then click the button under the “Default app” column
for the desired protocol to set a default app to open that protocol. When you are finished, click the “Back”
m
button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Defaults” settings category.

Sa

ly!
3.6- The “Privacy” Settings:
on
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Privacy” category at the left
side of the screen to display privacy settings within this window. The categories of settings are listed in the
pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this listing to change their
es
individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back” arrow that appears next
to the “Privacy” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC settings” window. This lesson will
examine the settings you can change within the “Privacy” settings category.
os
You can click the “General” category at the left side of this window to view general privacy settings in
the area to the right. You can enable or disable each setting shown by clicking its toggle switch to turn the
setting either “On” or “Off.” The settings under the “Change privacy options” section are “Let apps access
my name, picture, and other account info,” “Let apps use my advertising ID for experiences across apps
rp
(turning this off will reset your ID),” “Turn on SmartScreen Filter to check web content (URLs) that Windows
Store apps use,” “Show text suggestions based on what I type and write on this PC (turning this off will reset
pu
suggestions),” and “Let websites provide locally relevant content by accessing my language list.” You can
also click the “Manage my Microsoft advertising and other personalization info” command or the “Privacy
statement” command to open a web page that will allow you to either log-in to your Microsoft User account
to change privacy settings or view the Windows 8.1 privacy statement.
n
You can click the “Location” category at the left side of this window to view location-related privacy
settings in the area to the right. Under the “Location” section, you can click the toggle switch to either “On”
tio
or “Off” to enable or disable the “Let Windows and apps use my location” setting. If enabled, you can click
the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” next to each app listed within the “Let these apps use my location”
section to enable or disable location tracking for each app.
lua
You can click the “Webcam” category at the left side of this window to view webcam-related privacy
settings in the area to the right. Under the “Webcam” section, you can click the toggle switch to either “On”
or “Off” to enable or disable the “Let apps use my webcam” setting. If enabled, you can click the toggle
switch to either “On” or “Off” next to each app listed within the “Let these apps use my webcam” section to
va
enable or disable the usage of your webcam for each app.

You can click the “Microphone” category at the left side of this window to view microphone-related
privacy settings in the area to the right. Under the “Microphone” section, you can click the toggle switch to
e
either “On” or “Off” to enable or disable the “Let apps use my microphone” setting. If enabled, you can click
the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” next to each app listed within the “Let these apps use my
microphone” section to enable or disable the usage of your microphone for each app.
or
You can click the “Other devices” category at the left side of this window to view other device-related
privacy settings in the area to the right. If there are any devices that allow you to control app access, they
-f
will appear in this area.

ple
m
Sa

ly!
3.7- The “Network” Settings:
on
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Network” category at the left
side of the screen to display network settings within this window. The categories of settings are listed in the
pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this listing to change their
es
individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back” arrow that appears next
to the “Network” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC settings” window. This lesson
will examine the settings you can change within the “Network” settings category.
os
You can click the “Connections” category at the left side of this window to view connection settings in
the area to the right. Any active network connections you are using will be shown in the “Wi-Fi,” “Ethernet,”
and “VPN” sections. If you need to create a connection for any type listed, click the “Add a connection”
rp
button within the appropriate section to then enter the connection information into the window that appears.
For existing connections, you can click a connection shown in each section to view its connection details
within this window. You can then change the connection settings, such as the “Find devices and content”
pu
setting for each connection, by clicking the toggle switch shown to enable or disable that feature. You can
also click the “Copy” button shown to copy the connection settings, if needed. You can click the “Back”
arrow button in the upper-left corner of the connection screen to return to the “Connections” settings when
you are finished.
n
You can click the “Airplane mode” category at the left side of this window to view airplane mode
settings in the area to the right. Under the “Airplane mode” section, you can click the toggle switch to enable
tio
the “Turn this on to stop all wireless communications” setting. You can click the same switch to disable the
setting when you want to turn wireless communication back on. Under the “Wireless devices” section, you
can click the toggle switch to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable the “Wi-Fi” setting.
lua
You can click the “Proxy” category at the left side of this window to view proxy server settings in the
area to the right. A proxy server is a server to which your computer connects for things such as internet
access. Under the “Automatic proxy setup” section, the “Automatically detect settings” setting is enabled by
default. To specify an automatic configuration script to use for the proxy server or to enable manual proxy
va
server setup, you can click the toggle switch for this setting to turn it to the “Off” position. To then specify an
automatic configuration script to use, set the “Use automatic configuration script” toggle switch to the “On”
position by clicking it. You can then enter the pathway or address to the script by typing it into the “Script
e
address” text box and then clicking the adjacent “Save” button to save the configuration. Alternately, if you
wish to manually specify proxy server settings, ensure that the “Use automatic configuration script” toggle
switch setting is set to the “Off” position. Then enable the “Use a proxy server” toggle switch under the
or
“Manual proxy setup” section by clicking it to turn it to the “On” position. Then enter the address to the proxy
server into the “Address” text box and enter the port number used to connect into the “Port” text box. If there
-f
are addresses that you do not want the proxy server to resolve, you can enter them into the “Use the proxy
server except for addresses that start with the following entries. Use semicolons (;) to separate entries.” text
box. You can also check the “Don’t use the proxy server for local (intranet) addresses” checkbox to enable
ple
that feature. Once you have manually configured your proxy server settings, click the adjacent “Save” button
to save the settings.
You can click the “HomeGroup” category at the left side of this window to view HomeGroup settings
in the area to the right. A HomeGroup is a home network that allows you to share files, devices, and media
m
with other users of computers connected to the same HomeGroup network. If a HomeGroup has been
created on the network, you can enter the password to join the HomeGroup into the “Enter the homegroup
Sa
password” text box and then click the “Join” button to add the computer to the HomeGroup. If no
HomeGroup has yet been created on the network, you can instead click the “Create” button that appears
and then follow the onscreen prompts to create a HomeGroup for your network. If you create a HomeGroup,

ly!
3.7- The “Network” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
be sure to write down the HomeGroup password that is created as you will need to enter this password into
the Windows 8.1 installations on the other computers or devices to join the HomeGroup, as was just shown.
You can click the “Workplace” category at the left side of this window to view workplace connection
es
settings in the area to the right if you are using Windows 8.1 Pro. Under the “Workplace” section, enter the
user ID that you use to connect to resources on your work network into the “Enter your user ID to get
workplace access or turn on device management” text box. After that is correctly entered, click the “Join”
os
button to join your workplace network using the credentials specified. If you need to enable device
management on your work network, click the “Turn on” button.
rp
3.8- The “Time and language” Settings:
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Time and language”
pu
category at the left side of the screen to display time and language settings within this window. The
categories of settings are listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories
shown in this listing to change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can
click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Time and language” title at the left side of the window to
n
return to the main “PC settings” window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change within the
tio
“Time and language” settings category.
You can click the “Date and time” category at the left side of this window to view date and time
settings in the area to the right. In the “Date and time” section you can see the computer’s current date and
lua
time. You can click the “Set time automatically” toggle switch to either the “On” or “Off” position to enable or
disable Internet time synchronizing. If disabled, you can click the “Change” button to manually set the date
and time in the window that appears. You can select your time zone from the “Time zone” drop-down. To
allow your computer to automatically adjust for daylight savings time, ensure that the “Adjust for daylight
va
saving time automatically” toggle switch is set to the “On” position. You can click the toggle switch to toggle
it to the “Off” position, if needed. In the “Formats” section, you can see the display of date and time
increments. If you want to change the formatting of this display, click the “Change data and time formats”
e
command to display a window where you can use the drop-downs shown for each time and date increment
to choose the format to use for its display. Then click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner to
return to the “Date and time” settings when you are finished.
or
You can click the “Region and language” category at the left side of this window to view country and
language settings in the area to the right. In the “Country or region” section you can select your country from
the drop-down shown. Under the “Languages” section, you can see the languages that are set up for
-f
keyboard use on this computer. To add a new language keyboard, you can click the “Add a language”
button to open a new window where you can click the language to add. You can click the “Back” button in
ple
the upper-left corner to return to the “Region and language” settings, if needed. You can click on a language
shown within the “Languages” section to display additional buttons for the selection. If you have multiple
languages installed, you can click the “Set as primary” button to set that selected language as the primary
language on the computer. You can click the “Options” button to display a window that allows you to see
m
any options for the selected language. You can click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to
the “Region and language” settings, if needed. You can also click the “Remove” button to remove a
language that you have added to your computer if you have multiple languages installed.
Sa

ly!
3.9- The “Ease of Access” Settings:
on
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Ease of Access” category at
the left side of the screen to display accessibility settings within this window. The categories of settings are
listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting categories shown in this listing to
es
change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that you can click the “Back” arrow that
appears next to the “Ease of Access” title at the left side of the window to return to the main “PC settings”
window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change within the “Ease of Access” settings
os
category.
You can click the “Narrator” category at the left side of this window to view narrator settings in the
area to the right. Narrator is a utility that reads onscreen text aloud to the user. Under the “Hear text and
controls on the screen” section, you can click the “Narrator” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position to
rp
enable the Narrator utility. To enable the Narrator to start automatically, click the “Start Narrator
automatically” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position. In the “Voice” section, you can use the “Choose a
pu
voice” drop-down to select the voice of the Narrator. You can then use the “Speed” and “Pitch” sliders to
increase or decrease the speed and pitch of the voice. Under the “Sounds you hear” and “Cursor and keys”
sections you can click the toggle switches shown to set them to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable
or disable each setting. The settings shown in the “Sounds you hear” section are “Read hints for controls
n
and buttons, “ “Characters you type,” “Words you type,” “Lower the volume of other apps when Narrator is
running,” and “Play audio cues.” In the “Cursor and keys” section, the settings are “Highlight the cursor,”
tio
“Have insertion point follow the Narrator,” and “Activate keys on touch keyboard when I lift my finger off the
keyboard.”
You can click the “Magnifier” category at the left side of this window to view magnifier settings in the
lua
area to the right. Magnifier is a utility that magnifies the screen. Under the “Magnify things on the screen”
section, you can click the “Magnifier” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position to enable the Magnifier utility.
To invert the color of onscreen elements, click the “Invert colors” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position.
To enable the Magnifier to start automatically, click the “Start Magnifier automatically” toggle switch to set it
va
to the “On” position. In the “Tracking” section, you can click the toggle switches shown to set them to either
the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting. The settings shown are “Follow the keyboard
focus” and “Follow the mouse cursor.”
e
You can click the “High contrast” category at the left side of this window to view high contrast theme
settings in the area to the right. High contrast themes can be easier for some users to see. Under the
“Choose a theme” section, use the drop-down to select a high contrast theme. The colors used in the theme
or
for each onscreen element will be displayed below the drop-down. You can click the colors shown next to
any element to choose another color to use for that element from the pop-up color selector, if needed. To
-f
apply the selected theme to Windows 8.1, click the “Apply” button.
You can click the “Keyboard” category at the left side of this window to view keyboard accessibility
settings in the area to the right. These settings can make using the on-screen and standard keyboard easier
ple
for some users. Under the “On-screen keyboard” and “Useful keys” sections you can click the toggle
switches shown to set them to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting. The
setting shown in the “On-screen keyboard” section is “On-screen keyboard,” which enables or disables the
display of the on-screen keyboard. In the “Useful keys” section, the settings are “Sticky keys,” which allows
m
you to press one key at a time for keyboard shortcuts; “Toggle keys,” which allows you to hear a tone when
the Caps Lock or Num Lock or Scroll Lock keys are pressed; and “Filter keys,” which ignores brief or
Sa
repeated keystrokes.
You can click the “Mouse” category at the left side of this window to view mouse accessibility
settings in the area to the right. These settings can make using the mouse easier for some users. Under the

ly!
3.9- The “Ease of Access” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
“Pointer Size” section, you can select the size that you want the mouse pointer to appear onscreen by
clicking the desired choice of sizes shown. Under the “Pointer color” section, you can choose the color you
want the mouse pointer to be by clicking the desired mouse pointer color shown. Under the “Mouse keys”
es
section, you can click the “Use numeric keypad to move mouse around the screen” toggle switch to set it to
the “On” position and enable that feature. If enabled, you can then click the following two toggle switch
settings to set them to the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting. The two settings are
os
“Hold down Ctrl to speed up and Shift to slow down” and “Use mouse keys when Num Lock is on.”
You can click the “Other options” category at the left side of this window to view other visual
accessibility settings in the area to the right. In the “Visual options” section, you can click the toggle switches
shown to set them to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting. The settings shown
rp
are “Play animations in Windows” and “Show Windows backgrounds.” You can use the “Show notifications
for” drop-down to select the increment of time to display app notifications onscreen. You can use the slider
pu
under the “Cursor thickness” section to set how thick to make the text insertion mark cursor appear. You can
see the thickness shown in the box to the left of the slider.
3.10- The “Update and recovery” Settings: n

tio
Within the “PC settings” app window in Windows 8.1, you can click the “Update and recovery”
category at the left side of the screen to display Windows Update and recovery settings within this window.
The categories of settings are listed in the pane at the left side of the screen. You click the setting
lua
categories shown in this listing to change their individual settings in the right side of this window. Note that
you can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Update and recovery” title at the left side of the
window to return to the main “PC settings” window. This lesson will examine the settings you can change
within the “Update and recovery” settings category.
va
You can click the “Windows Update” category at the left side of this window to view Windows Update
settings in the area to the right. Windows Update is a utility that installs updates to your Windows software.
In the “Windows Update” section you can see your Windows Update installation configuration information.
You can click the “View details” command to display a window that shows any updates you can install. You
e
can then check any updates you want to install and then click the “Install” button to install the selected
updates. You can click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the window to return to the
or
“Windows Update” settings after checking for updates if you choose to not install any. You can manually
check for updates by clicking the “Check now” button. You can view the history of installed updates by
clicking the “View your update history” command. You can then click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-
-f
left corner of the window to return to the “Windows Update” settings. You can click the “Choose how
updates get installed” command to view a window that allows you to choose how and when updates are
ple
installed. You can use the drop-down under the “Important updates” setting to choose how to install those
updates. You can also check the checkboxes for “Recommended updates” and “Microsoft updates” to also
check for optional recommended updates and updates to any other Microsoft software products, such as
Microsoft Office, in addition to updates for Windows. If you change any settings here, you can click the
m
“Apply” button to apply them or click the “Cancel” button to cancel your changes. To return to the “Windows
Updates” settings, click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner.
You can click the “File History” category at the left side of this window to view File History settings in
Sa
the area to the right. File History is a utility that saves copies of files within the Documents, Music, Pictures,
Videos, and Desktop folders automatically so that you can get them back if they are lost or damaged. These

ly!
3.10- The “Update and recovery” Settings- (cont’d.):
on
files are most often saved to an external hard drive connected to your computer. Windows will automatically
search for the drive that it thinks is the best drive to which to it should save the files. If you want to select a
different drive, click the “Select a different drive” command to allow Windows to search for any connected
es
external hard drives to which you can back up your files. You can then click the name of the connected hard
drive to use for the backups from the pop-up menu that appears. To enable the “File History” feature, click
the “File History” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position. If you then want to manually back up the files to
os
the selected drive, click the “Back up now” button to begin.
You can click the “Recovery” category at the left side of this window to view recovery settings in the
area to the right. The tools can help advanced users restore their Windows system in case of an
emergency. In the “Refresh your PC without affecting your files” section, you can click the “Get started”
rp
button to begin a process that will restore Windows to its default operating state without removing any data
files. If you plan on giving away your PC, or you want to remove all of the content on your computer and
pu
start over, you can click the “Get started” button under the “Remove everything and reinstall Windows”
section and then follow the onscreen prompts to erase and reset your computer. Note that this is an extreme
choice that will completely wipe out all of the files and settings on your computer, forcing you to start over
from scratch. You should only do this if you are planning to give the computer away and only after you have
n
safely backed up all files and folders that you want to keep from your PC, first.
If you need to change the way that Windows 8.1 boots up by default, you can change the boot and
tio
startup settings by clicking the “Restart now” button under the “Advanced startup” section. This is
sometimes used by computer professionals to allow Windows 8.1 to boot from an alternate device, such as
a USB dive, and is not often needed by most users.
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING SETTINGS IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. To show the settings for the currently displayed app on your computer, roll your pointer to the
upper-right or lower-right corners of the Windows 8.1 screen until the Charm Bar appears and then roll
your pointer over the Charm Bar until it appears solid. You can also open it by swiping in from the right
es
edge of a touch screen, or by simply pressing the Windows + C keys on your keyboard.
2. Click the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar to display the settings for the currently displayed app in
a pane at the right side of the window.
os
3. At the top of the “Settings” pane you can click the links shown to access settings for the currently
displayed app within Windows 8.1.
4. At the bottom of the pane you will see icons that represent general computer settings. These include the
rp
internet connection, audio, display settings, notification settings, power settings, and default language.
5. To hide the “Settings” pane without making any changes, click back into the middle of the screen
again to hide the “Settings” pane.
pu
6. To open the “PC settings” app windows where you can make changes to the settings of your
computer, click the “Change PC settings” command at the bottom of the “Settings” pane.
7. In the “PC settings” app window, you can click the categories shown at the left side to change the
various settings within that category to the right. The categories shown for laptop and desktop devices
n
include “PC and devices,” “Accounts,” “SkyDrive,” “Search and apps,” “Privacy,” “Network,” “Time and
language,” “Ease of Access,” and “Update and recovery.”
tio
8. In the pane at the right side of the “PC settings” window you can see basic personalization options
shown and you can click the “View recently used settings” command to display recently accessed
settings here so that you won’t need to find those settings again within the setting categories to change
lua
a recently changed setting again.

9. To close the “PC settings” app window, click and hold down or tap and hold down at the top of the
app window and then drag the application to the bottom of the screen.
va
ACCESSING THE “PC AND DEVICES” SETTINGS:

e
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “PC and devices” command at the left side of the
screen.
2. You click the setting categories shown in the listing at the left side of this window to change their
or
individual settings in the right side of this window.

3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “PC and settings” title at the left side of the
window to return to the main “PC settings” window.
-f
4. If you click the “Lock screen” category at the left side of the window, you will see a picture of your
current lock screen shown in the “Lock screen preview” section to the right.
ple
5. To select a new lock screen picture, click one of the choices shown below the current lock screen or
click the “Browse” button to display the picture files on your computer within a “Files” window where you
can click your choice to select it and then click the “Choose image” button. You can click the “Cancel”
button within the “Files” screen to return to the “PC settings” window without making a picture selection.
m
6. To play a slide show as your lock screen, click the “Play a slide show” toggle button to set it to the
“On” position. To turn off the slide show, click this same toggle button to set it to the “Off” position.
7. If you have slides shows turned “on,” then in the “Use pictures from” section you will see the folder
Sa
within which Windows 8.1 will take the photos that will be used for the slide show.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “PC AND DEVICES” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
8. It defaults to using the “Pictures” within the SkyDrive folder and the “Pictures” within the “Pictures”
library. You can remove any of these folders by clicking the folder and then clicking the “Remove” button
that appears.
es
9. To add a custom folder to the slide show, click the “Add folder” button to open a “Files” window
where you can navigate into the folder you want to add and then click the “Choose this folder” button to
add the folder you are within to the slide show. You can also click the “Cancel” button to cancel folder
os
selection, if desired.
10. Back in the “Lock screen preview” section you can click the settings buttons shown to toggle each of the
following features of the slide show to either the “On” or “Off” positions: “Include Camera Roll folders
from this PC and SkyDrive,” “Only use pictures that will best fit on my screen,” Play a slide show when
rp
using battery power,” and “When my PC is inactive, show the lock screen instead of turning off the
screen.”
pu
11. You can then use the “Turn off screen after slide show has played for” drop-down to set the duration of
time to play the slide show before turning of the display.
12. In the “Lock screen apps” section, you select which apps that you have installed will be allowed to run in
the background when the lock screen is shown to show quick status updates and notifications.
n
13. To add an app to run in the background when the lock screen is shown to show quick status
updates and notifications, click any of the small plus signs shown in this area to then select the app
tio
whose information you want to display from the pop-up menu that appears.
14. You can also click an existing app tile shown here and then select the “Don’t show quick status here”
command from the pop-up menu to remove an app. You can also select a different app to substitute for
lua
the selected app from the pop-up menu that is shown, if you prefer.
15. To select a single app for which you want to show detailed status updates in the lock screen,
click the app icon under the “Choose an app to display detailed status” section and then choose the
desired app from the pop-up menu shown.
va
16. You can select a single app from which to show alarms by clicking the small app icon under the
“Choose an app to show alarms” section and then selecting the name of the app to use from the pop-up
menu that appears.
e
17. To enable the use of the camera on your PC when in the lock screen, click the “Swipe down on the
lock screen to use the camera” option button to set it to the “On” position. You can then use the camera
when in the lock screen by swiping down on the lock screen itself.
or
18. You can click the “Display” category in the pane at the left side of the window to show display
customization settings in the area to the right.
-f
19. Under the “Customize your display” section you will see any connected monitors shown in a numbered
diagram. You can change the display settings of a monitor shown here by clicking it.
20. You can click the “Identify” command below the diagram to display the number of each monitor
ple
onscreen so that you can tell which monitor is which, if needed.

21. After connecting an external display, you can click the “Detect” command below the diagram to detect
the secondary display.
22. To change the screen resolution of a selected monitor, click and drag the “Resolution” slider to the
m
left or right. The current screen resolution for the selected monitor will be shown above the slider.
23. You can use the “Orientation” drop-down to select a screen orientation, if needed.
Sa
24. To apply your screen resolution changes, click the “Apply” button. You can cancel changes by
clicking the “Cancel” button.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
on
25. In the “More options” section you can use the drop-down to select a size for apps, text, and other items
for monitors that can support it, if desired.
26. To connect to a wireless display, click the “Connect to a wireless display” command to open the
es
“Project” pane at the far right side of the window which you can use to select a second display or click
the “Add a wireless display” command to switch the window to the “Devices” setting category and begin
the search for a wireless display.
os
27. You can click the “Devices” category at the left side of the window to display your devices settings in the
area to the right.
28. If you have connected a device and Windows 8.1 does not automatically recognize it, you can click the
“Add a device” button in the “Add devices” section to have Windows 8.1 attempt to automatically search
rp
for and install the device.
29. In the “Printers” section below that, you will see a listing of the available printing devices for your
pu
computer.
30. To remove a printer from this list, click the name of the printer and then click the “Remove device”
button that appears. Note that you cannot manage printer settings from this window.
31. If there are other types of devices connected, you can see them within the “Other devices” category.
n
Just as with the printers, you can click the name of a device shown in this listing and then click the
“Remove device” button that appears to remove a selected device, if needed.
tio
32. It is recommended that you leave the “Download over metered connections” option set to the “Off”
position so that you will not download device software over a metered connection. However, if a
metered internet connection is your only connection option, you may consider turning this “On.”
lua
33. To save music, pictures, and video to an external removable drive by default, connect the external
hard drive and then click the “Set up” button under the “Default save locations” section to choose into
which folders on the external hard drive you want to save those types of items by default.
34. You can click the “Mouse and touchpad” category at the left side of the screen to view mouse and
va
touchpad settings in the area to the right.

35. Under the “Mouse” section you can use the two drop-downs to select which mouse button is your
primary mouse button and what you want to have happen when you roll the mouse wheel.
e
36. If you choose the “Multiple lines at a time” choice from the second drop-down you can use the slider
underneath it to set the number of lines to scroll when you roll your mouse wheel.
37. Under the “Touchpad” section, you can use the drop-down to set the amount of delay before clicks to
or
the touchpad will be recognized. A longer setting makes the touchpad less responsive to accidental
touching.
-f
38. You can click the “Typing” category at the left to display typing settings in the area to the right.
39. Here you can click the “Autocorrect misspelled words” and “Highlight misspelled words” options to turn
them “On” or “Off.” They are both set to the “On” position by default.
ple
40. You can click the “Corners and edges” category to display settings that allow you to control the swiping
and corner behaviors of Windows 8.1 in the area to the right.
41. Here you can click the switches shown to turn the settings either “On” or “Off.” The settings under the
“App switching” section are “Allow switching between recent apps” and “When I swipe in from the left
m
edge, switch between my recent apps instead of showing a list of them.”

42. Under the “Corner navigation section,” the settings are “When I point to the upper-right corner, show the
Sa
charms” and “When I click the upper-left corner, switch between my recent apps.” Note that these are all
set to “On” by default.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
on
43. You can click the “Clear list” button that appears within the “App switching” section to clear the list of
recent apps, if desired.
44. You can click the “Power and sleep” category at the left side of this window to display the power settings
es
for your monitor and computer in the area to the right. You can select an increment of time from the four
drop-down settings to set the amount of time you want to elapse before that setting is applied.
45. In the “Screen” section, the settings are “On battery power, turn off after” and “When plugged in, turn off
os
after.”
46. In the “Sleep” section, the settings are “On battery power, PC goes to sleep after” and “When plugged
in, PC goes to sleep after.
47. You can click the “AutoPlay” category at the left side of the window to set your AutoPlay preferences in
rp
the area to the right.
48. To enable AutoPlay for all media and devices, ensure that the “Use AutoPlay for all media and
pu
devices” option is set to “On.” You can click it to turn it “Off,” if needed.
49. In the “Choose AutoPlay Defaults” section, you can use the “Removable drive” and “Memory card” drop-
downs to set a default action to take when a device of that type is connected, if desired.
50. You can click the “PC info” category at the left side of this window to view basic information about your
n
computer in the screen to the right. Here you can see several settings, including your “PC name,”
“Processor,” “Installed RAM,” and “System type.”
tio
51. You can also view information about your version of Windows under the “Windows” section.
52. You can see the name of your computer’s manufacturer under the “Support” section and click the Online
support” hyperlink to open a web page for hardware support from your manufacturer.
lua
ACCESSING THE “ACCOUNTS” SETTINGS:

va
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Accounts” command at the left side of the screen.
e
3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Accounts” title at the left side of the window to
return to the main “PC settings” window.
4. You can click the “Your account” category at the left side of this window to view settings for your user
or
account in the area to the right.

5. Your name and the e-mail account associated with your Microsoft user account will be show at the top
-f
of the window.
6. You can click the “More account settings online” hyperlink to open a web page that will allow you to
manage more settings for your Microsoft user account online.
ple
7. In the “Account picture” section you will see your current Microsoft user account picture.
8. To select a different account picture, click the “Browse” button to open the “Files” window where you
can select another image to use.
9. Select an image and click the “Choose image” button to use the selected image as your account picture.
m
You can click the “Cancel” button if you decide not to select an account picture.
10. To create a new account picture using an app, then in the “Create an account picture” section, select
the desired app under the “Create an account picture” section to use the selected app to create your
Sa
account picture if you have an app installed that you can use to create an account picture.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “ACCOUNTS” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
11. You can click the “Sign-in options” category at the left side of the screen to see the available security
and sign-in options that you can set in the area to the right.
12. To change your account password used to login, click the “Change” button in the “Password”
es
section and then following the onscreen prompts to reset your login password.
13. For touch screen devices, such as a tablet PC, you can click the “Add” button in the “Picture password”
section and then follow the onscreen prompts to create a picture that you must click in specific areas to
os
login to a touch screen computing device.
14. You can click the “Add” button in the “PIN” section and then follow the onscreen prompts to create four-
digit PIN number that can also be used to allow access to touch screen devices in conjunction with a
rp
picture password for added security.
15. You can also change whether or not you need to re-enter your password when waking this computer
from its sleep mode by clicking the “Change” button in the “Password policy” section.
pu
16. You can click the “Other accounts” category at the left side of the screen to manage other user accounts
on this computer in the area to the right if you are signed-in with a user account that is set up as an
“Administrator” user account on this computer.
17. To create a new user account, click the “Add an account” button and then follow the onscreen prompts
n
to create a new user account. You must have an “Administrator” local user account type to do this.
18. To remove or manage other user accounts, click the “Edit” button to change the local account type
tio
settings of the account (“Standard,” “Administrator,” or “Child”) in the onscreen prompts that appears or
click the “Remove” button to remove that account from your computer.
19. You can also click the “Set up an account for assigned access” command to select and account and an
lua
app to use for assigned access. With assigned access the user account can only access one app,
downloaded from the Windows Store, that you select. You can then follow the onscreen prompts to
select the account and the app to use.
va
ACCESSING THE “SKYDRIVE” SETTINGS:

e
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “SkyDrive” command at the left side of the screen.
or
3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “SkyDrive” title at the left side of the window to
4. You can click the “File storage” category at the left side of this window to view remote file storage
-f
settings in the area to the right.

5. The amount of remote storage and the space used are displayed in the “SkyDrive storage” section.
ple
6. To buy more storage space, click the Buy more storage” button to open a page to make that transaction.
7. To save your documents to the SkyDrive by default, ensure that the “Save documents to SkyDrive
by default” switch is set to the “On” position. To save documents locally by default, you can click the
switch to set it to the “Off” position.
m
8. You can click the “See my files on SkyDrive” link to open the “SkyDrive” app and see the contents of
your SkyDrive folders within the app window.
9. You can click the “Camera roll” category at the left side of the window to view SkyDrive settings for your
Sa
“Camera roll” folder at the right side of the window.

(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “SKYDRIVE” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
10. In the “Upload photos and video” section, choose the option button that corresponds to your preference
for uploading pictures to SkyDrive from your “Camera Roll” folder.
11. To automatically upload videos to SkyDrive, click the “Automatically upload videos to SkyDrive”
es
switch to toggle it to the “On” position.
12. You can click the “Sync settings” category at the left side of the window to view the synchronization
options for your user account on this computer at the right side of the window.
os
13. In the area to the right you will see a series of toggles switches that you can click to switch them to the
“Off” position, if desired, to disable the setting. By default, all of these switches are set to the “On”
position.
14. In the “Sync settings with SkyDrive” section you can choose whether or not to sync your settings on this
rp
PC. Under the “Personalization” section, the settings are “Start screen,” “Appearance,” and “Desktop
personalization.”
pu
15. Under the “App settings” section, the settings are “Apps” and “App data.”
16. Under the “Other settings” section, the settings are “Web browser,” “Passwords,” “Language
preferences,” “Ease of Access,” and “Other Windows settings.”
17. Under the “Back up settings” section, you can choose whether or not to save these settings for this PC
to the SkyDrive so you can restore them if needed.n
18. You can click the “Metered connections” category at the left side of the window to view settings that
tio
determine how you use SkyDrive over a metered internet connection at the right side of the window. In
the area to the right you will see a series of toggles switches that you can click to switch them either
“On” or “Off” to enable or disable the setting.
lua
19. The settings under the “Use SkyDrive over metered connections” section are “Upload and download
files over metered connections” and “Upload and download files over metered connections even when
I’m roaming.”
20. The settings under the “Sync settings” section are “Sync and backup settings over metered
va
connections” and “Sync and backup settings over metered connections even when I’m roaming.”
e
ACCESSING THE “SEARCH AND APPS” SETTINGS:
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Search and apps” command at the left side of the
or
screen.
-f

3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Search and apps” title at the left side of the
ple
4. You can click the “Search” category at the left side of this window to view settings for the “Search” app
and the “Search” pane within the Charm Bar in the area to the right.
5. To clear your search history, click the “Clear” button in the “Search history” section.
6. You can click the “Manage my Microsoft advertising and other personalization info” command to open a
m
web page that will allow you to sign-in with your Microsoft user account to set your advertising and other
personal preferences for your account.
7. Under the “Use Bing to search online” section you can click the switch to enable or disable the use of
Sa
Bing to display the results of web searches. If disabled, the options within this page are inaccessible.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “SEARCH AND APPS” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
8. Under the “Your search experience” section, choose the option button that corresponds to the level of
personalization you want your web search results to use.
9. Under the “SafeSearch” section, choose the option button that corresponds to the level of content
es
filtering of web results you want Bing to use.
10. In the “Metered connections” section, you can click the toggle switches to enable or disable the settings
shown by turning them “On” or “Off.” The settings are “Get search suggestions and web results from
os
Bing over metered connections” and “Get search suggestions and web results from Bing over metered
connections even when I’m roaming.”
11. You can click the “Privacy statement” hyperlink to open a web page to view the Windows 8.1 privacy
rp
statement, if desired.
12. You can click the “Share” category at the left side of this window to view app sharing settings in the area
to the right.
pu
13. Under the “Sharing options” section you can click the switches for the two settings shown to toggle the
options “On” or “Off.” The settings shown are “Show apps I use most often at the top of the apps list”
and “Show a list of how I share most often.”
14. If you enable the second option, then choose the number of items to display in that list from the “Items in
list” drop-down menu. n
15. You can click the “Clear list” button to clear the list of most used apps.
tio
16. Under the “Use these apps to share” section you can enable or disable the use of the listed app for
sharing by clicking the toggle switch button next to each app to turn it “On” or “Off.”
17. You can click the “Notifications” category at the left side of this window to view app notification settings
lua
in the area to the right.

18. Under the “Notifications” section, you can click the toggle switch to turn it “On” or “Off” to enable or
disable each setting shown. The settings are “Show app notifications,” “Show app notifications on the
lock screen,” “Play notification sounds” and “Turn on my screen when I get a call.”
va
19. Under the “Quiet hours” section, you can enable a duration of time when you will not receive
notifications from apps by turning the “Quiet hours” setting to the “On” position. You can click the switch
to toggle quiet hours “Off,” if you prefer.
e
20. If enabled, you can choose which hours will be the quiet hours by selecting a starting and ending time
using the drop-downs under the “From” and “To” sections.
21. To receive calls during quiet hours, ensure that the “Receive calls during quiet hours” switch is set to the
or
“On” position. You can disable calls during this time by clicking the switch to turn it to the “Off” position.
22. Under the “Show notifications from these apps” section, you can decide from which apps you want to
-f
receive notifications. For each app listed, you can click its toggle switch to toggle notifications from each
app “On” or “Off.”
23. You can click the “App sizes” category at the left side of this window to view app the sizes of apps that
ple
are installed and to uninstall apps you do not want in the area to the right.
24. To uninstall an app, click an app within this list and then click the “Uninstall” button that appears.
25. You can click the “Defaults” category at the left side of this window to view settings that determine which
app is set to be used by default to perform tasks in Windows 8.1 in the area to the right.
m
26. Under the “Choose default apps” section you can click the app tile shown to select the name of the app
that you want to use for each activity by default from a pop-up menu of app choices that appears.
Sa
27. If no default app has been set, click the “Choose a default” button to select a default app from the same
pop-up menu of apps that appears.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “SEARCH AND APPS” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
28. For advanced users, you can select which app to use by default by associating a default app with a file
extension or protocol.
29. To associate an app by file extension, click the “Choose default apps by file type” command.
es
30. Then scroll through the listing of file types shown and then click the button under the “Default app”
column for the desired file type to set a default app to open that type of file.
31. When finished, click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Defaults” settings.
os
32. To associate an app by protocol, click the “Choose default apps by protocol” command.
33. Then scroll through the listing of protocols shown and then click the button under the “Default app”
column for the desired protocol to set a default app to open that protocol.
34. When finished, click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Defaults” settings.
rp
ACCESSING THE “PRIVACY” SETTINGS:
pu
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Privacy” command at the left side of the screen.
n
3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Privacy” title at the left side of the window to
tio
4. You can click the “General” category at the left side of this window to view general privacy settings in
lua
5. You can enable or disable each setting shown by clicking its toggle switch to turn it either “On” or “Off.”
6. The settings under the “Change privacy options” section are “Let apps access my name, picture, and
other account info,” “Let apps use my advertising ID for experiences across apps (turning this off will
reset your ID),” “Turn on SmartScreen Filter to check web content (URLs) that Windows Store apps
va
use,” “Show text suggestions based on what I type and write on this PC (turning this off will reset
suggestions),” and “Let websites provide locally relevant content by accessing my language list.”
7. You can click the “Manage my Microsoft advertising and other personalization info” command or the
“Privacy statement” command to open a web page that will allow you to either log-in to your Microsoft
e
User account to change privacy settings or view the Windows 8.1 privacy statement.
8. You can click the “Location” category at the left side of this window to view location-related privacy
or

9. Under the “Location” section, you can click the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” to enable or disable
the “Let Windows and apps use my location” setting.
-f
10. If enabled, you can click the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” next to each app listed within the “Let
these apps use my location” section to enable or disable location tracking for each app.
ple
11. You can click the “Webcam” category at the left side of this window to view webcam-related privacy
12. Under the “Webcam” section, you can click the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” to enable or disable
the “Let apps use my webcam” setting.
m
these apps use my webcam” section to enable or disable the usage of your webcam for each app.
14. You can click the “Microphone” category at the left side of this window to view microphone-related
Sa
privacy settings in the area to the right.

(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “PRIVACY” SETTINGS:
on
15. Under the “Microphone” section, you can click the toggle switch to either “On” or “Off” to enable or
disable the “Let apps use my microphone” setting.
es
these apps use my microphone” section to enable or disable using your microphone with each app.
17. You can click the “Other devices” category at the left side of this window to view other device-related
privacy settings in the area to the right. If there are any devices that allow you to control app access,
os
they will appear in this area.
ACCESSING THE “NETWORK” SETTINGS:
rp
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Network” command at the left side of the screen.
pu
3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Network” title at the left side of the window to
4. You can click the “Connections” category at the left side of this window to view connection settings in
n
tio
5. Any active network connections you are using will be shown in the “Wi-Fi,” “Ethernet,” and “VPN”
sections.
6. To create a network connection for any type listed, click the “Add a connection” button within the
lua
appropriate section to then enter the connection information into the window that appears.
7. To edit existing network connections, click a connection shown in any section to view its connection
details within a new window and then change the connection settings, such as the “Find devices and
content” setting, by clicking the toggle switch shown to enable or disable that feature.
va
8. You can click the “Copy” button shown to copy the connection settings, if needed.
9. Click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the connection screen to return to the
“Connections” settings when finished.
10. You can click the “Airplane mode” category at the left side of this window to view airplane mode settings
e

11. To enable “Airplane mode” and stop all wireless communications, click the toggle switch to enable
or
the “Turn this on to stop all wireless communications” setting under the “Airplane mode” section. You
can click the same switch to disable the setting when you want to turn wireless communication back on.
12. To turn “Wi-Fi” on and off, click the toggle switch under the “Wireless devices” section to either the
-f
“On” or “Off” positions.

13. You can click the “Proxy” category at the left side of this window to view proxy server settings in the
ple
area to the right.

14. Under the “Automatic proxy setup” section, the “Automatically detect settings” setting is enabled by
default.
15. To specify an automatic configuration script to use for the proxy server or to enable manual
m
proxy server setup, click the toggle switch for this setting to turn it to the “Off” position.
16. To specify an automatic configuration script to use, set the “Use automatic configuration script”
toggle switch to the “On” position by clicking it.
Sa
17. Then enter the pathway or address to the script by typing it into the “Script address” text box and then
clicking the adjacent “Save” button to save the configuration.
(cont’d.)
ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “NETWORK” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
18. To manually specify proxy server settings, ensure that the “Use automatic configuration script”
toggle switch setting is set to the “Off” position.
19. Then enable the “Use a proxy server” toggle switch under the “Manual proxy setup” section by clicking it
es
to turn it to the “On” position.
20. Then enter the address to the proxy server into the “Address” text box and enter the port number used
to connect into the “Port” text box.
os
21. If there are addresses that you do not want the proxy server to resolve, you can enter them into the “Use
the proxy server except for addresses that start with the following entries. Use semicolons (;) to
separate entries.” text box.
22. You can also check the “Don’t use the proxy server for local (intranet) addresses” checkbox to enable
rp
that feature.
23. After manually configuring your proxy server settings, click the “Save” button to save the settings.
pu
24. You can click the “HomeGroup” category at the left side of this window to view HomeGroup settings in
25. To join a HomeGroup has been created on the network, enter the password to join the HomeGroup
into the “Enter the homegroup password” text box and then click the “Join” button.
n
26. To create a HomeGroup on the network, instead click the “Create” button that appears and then
follow the onscreen prompts to create a HomeGroup for your network.
tio
27. If you create a HomeGroup, be sure to write down the HomeGroup password that is created as you will
need to enter this password into the Windows 8.1 installations on the other computers or devices to join
the HomeGroup.
lua
28. You can click the “Workplace” category at the left side of this window to view workplace connection
settings in the area to the right if you are using Windows 8.1 Pro.
29. To connect to a work network, enter the user ID that you use to connect to resources on your work
network into the “Enter your user ID to get workplace access or turn on device management” text box
va
under the “Workplace” section.

30. After that is correctly entered, click the “Join” button to join your workplace network using the credentials
specified.
e
31. To enable device management on your work network, click the “Turn on” button.
or
ACCESSING THE “TIME AND LANGUAGE” SETTINGS:

-f
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Time and language” command at the left side of the
screen.
ple

3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Time and language” title at the left side of the
4. You can click the “Date and time” category at the left side of this window to view date and time settings
m

5. In the “Date and time” section you can see the computer’s current date and time.
6. To automatically set the time on your computer, click the “Set time automatically” toggle switch to
Sa
either the “On” or “Off” position to enable or disable Internet time synchronizing.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “TIME AND LANGUAGE” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
7. If disabled, you can click the “Change” button to manually set the date and time in the window that
appears.
8. You can select your time zone from the “Time zone” drop-down.
es
9. To allow your computer to automatically adjust for daylight savings time, ensure that the “Adjust
for daylight saving time automatically” toggle switch is set to the “On” position. You can click the toggle
switch to toggle it to the “Off” position, if needed.
os
10. In the “Formats” section, you can see the display of date and time increments.
11. To change the formatting of this display, click the “Change data and time formats” command to display a
window where you can use the drop-downs shown for each time and date increment to choose the
rp
format to use for its display.
12. Then click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Date and time” settings when
you are finished.
pu
13. You can click the “Region and language” category at the left side of this window to view country and
language settings in the area to the right.
14. In the “Country or region” section you can select your country from the drop-down shown.
15. Under the “Languages” section, you can see the languages that are set up for keyboard use on this
computer. n
16. To add a new language keyboard, click the “Add a language” button to open a new window where you
tio
can click the language to add.
17. You can click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Region and language” settings.
18. You can click on a language shown within the “Languages” section to display additional buttons for the
lua
selection.
19. If you have multiple languages installed, you can click the “Set as primary” button to set that selected
language as the primary language on the computer.
20. You can click the “Options” button to display a window that allows you to see any options for the
va
selected language.
21. You can click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner to return to the “Region and language” settings, if
needed.
e
22. You can also click the “Remove” button to remove a language that you have added to your computer if
you have multiple languages installed.
or
ACCESSING THE “EASE OF ACCESS” SETTINGS:

-f
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Ease of Access” command at the left side of the
screen.
ple
3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Ease of Access” title at the left side of the
m
4. You can click the “Narrator” category at the left side of this window to view narrator settings in the area
to the right.
5. To enable the Narrator utility, click the “Narrator” toggle switch under the “Hear text and controls on
Sa
the screen” section to set it to the “On” position.

(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “EASE OF ACCESS” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
6. To enable the Narrator to start automatically, click the “Start Narrator automatically” toggle switch to set
it to the “On” position.
7. In the “Voice” section, you can use the “Choose a voice” drop-down to select the voice of the Narrator.
es
8. You can use the “Speed” and “Pitch” sliders to increase or decrease the speed and pitch of the voice.
9. Under the “Sounds you hear” and “Cursor and keys” sections you can click the toggle switches shown to
set them to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting.
os
10. The settings shown in the “Sounds you hear” section are “Read hints for controls and buttons, “
“Characters you type,” “Words you type,” “Lower the volume of other apps when Narrator is running,”
and “Play audio cues.”
11. In the “Cursor and keys” section, the settings are “Highlight the cursor,” “Have insertion point follow the
rp
Narrator,” and “Activate keys on touch keyboard when I lift my finger off the keyboard.”
12. You can click the “Magnifier” category at the left side of this window to view magnifier settings in the
pu
area to the right.
13. To enable the Magnifier utility, click the “Magnifier” toggle switch under the “Magnify things on the
screen” section to set it to the “On” position.
14. To invert the color of onscreen elements, click the “Invert colors” toggle switch to set it to the “On”
position. n
15. To enable the Magnifier to start automatically, click the “Start Magnifier automatically” toggle switch to
tio
set it to the “On” position.
16. In the “Tracking” section, you can click the toggle switches shown to set them to either the “On” or “Off”
positions to enable or disable each setting. The settings shown are “Follow the keyboard focus” and
lua
“Follow the mouse cursor.”

17. To set a high contrast theme, click the “High contrast” category at the left side of this window to view
high contrast theme settings in the area to the right.
18. Under the “Choose a theme” section, use the drop-down to select a high contrast theme.
va
19. The colors used in the theme for each onscreen element will be displayed below the drop-down. You
can click the colors shown next to any element to choose another color to use for that element from the
pop-up color selector, if needed.
e
20. To apply the selected high contrast theme to Windows 8.1, click the “Apply” button.
21. You can click the “Keyboard” category at the left side of this window to view keyboard accessibility
or
22. Under the “On-screen keyboard” and “Useful keys” sections you can click the toggle switches shown to
set them to either the “On” or “Off” positions to enable or disable each setting.
-f
23. To enable the display of the on-screen keyboard, click the “On-screen keyboard setting shown in the
“On-screen keyboard” section to turn it to the “On” position.
24. In the “Useful keys” section, the settings are “Sticky keys,” which allows you to press one key at a time
ple
for keyboard shortcuts; “Toggle keys,” which allows you to hear a tone when the Caps Lock or Num
Lock or Scroll Lock keys are pressed; and “Filter keys,” which ignores brief or repeated keystrokes.
25. You can click the “Mouse” category at the left side of this window to view mouse accessibility settings in
m
26. Under the “Pointer Size” section, you can select the size that you want the mouse pointer to appear
onscreen by clicking the desired choice of sizes shown.
Sa
27. Under the “Pointer color” section, you can choose the color you want the mouse pointer to be by clicking
the desired mouse pointer color shown.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “EASE OF ACCESS” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
28. Under the “Mouse keys” section, you can click the “Use numeric keypad to move mouse around the
screen” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position and enable that feature.
29. If enabled, you can then click the following two toggle switch settings to set them to the “On” or “Off”
es
positions to enable or disable each setting. The two settings are “Hold down Ctrl to speed up and Shift
to slow down” and “Use mouse keys when Num Lock is on.”
30. You can click the “Other options” category at the left side of this window to view other visual accessibility
os
31. In the “Visual options” section, you can click the toggle switches shown to set them to either the “On” or
“Off” positions to enable or disable each setting. The settings shown are “Play animations in Windows”
and “Show Windows backgrounds.”
rp
32. You can use the “Show notifications for” drop-down to select the increment of time to display app
notifications onscreen.
pu
33. You can use the slider under the “Cursor thickness” section to set how thick to make the text insertion
mark cursor appear. You can see the thickness shown in the box to the left of the slider.
ACCESSING THE “UPDATE AND RECOVERY” SETTINGS: n

tio
1. Open the “PC settings” app window and click the “Update and recovery” command at the left side of the
screen.
lua

3. You can click the “Back” arrow that appears next to the “Update and recovery” title at the left side of the
4. You can click the “Windows Update” category at the left side of this window to view Windows Update
va

5. In the “Windows Update” section you can see your Windows Update installation configuration
information.
6. You can click the “View details” command to display a window that shows any updates you can install.
e
7. You can then check any updates you want to install and then click the “Install” button to install the
selected updates.
or
8. You can click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the window to return to the “Windows
Update” settings after checking for updates if you choose to not install any updates.
9. You can manually check for updates by clicking the “Check now” button.
-f
10. You can view the history of installed updates by clicking the “View your update history” command.
11. You can then click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the window to return to the
ple
“Windows Update” settings.

12. You can click the “Choose how updates get installed” command to view a window that allows you to
choose how and when updates are installed.
13. You can use the drop-down under the “Important updates” setting to choose how to install those
m
updates.
14. You can also check the checkboxes for “Recommended updates” and “Microsoft updates” to also check
for optional recommended updates and updates to any other Microsoft software products, such as
Sa
Microsoft Office, in addition to updates for Windows.

(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
ACCESSING THE “UPDATE AND RECOVERY” SETTINGS- (CONT’D.):
on
15. If you change any settings here, you can click the “Apply” button to apply them or click the “Cancel”
button to cancel your changes.
16. To return to the “Windows Updates” settings, click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner.
es
17. You can click the “File History” category at the left side of this window to view File History settings in the
area to the right.
18. Windows will automatically search for the drive that it thinks is the best drive to which to it should save
os
the files. To select a different drive, click the “Select a different drive” command to allow Windows to
search for any connected external hard drives to which you can back up your files.
19. You can then click the name of the connected hard drive to use for the backups from the pop-up menu
rp
that appears.
20. To enable the “File History” feature, click the “File History” toggle switch to set it to the “On” position.
21. To manually back up the files to the selected drive, click the “Back up now” button to begin.
pu
22. You can click the “Recovery” category at the left side of this window to view recovery settings in the
area to the right. The tools can help advanced users restore their Windows system in case of an
emergency.
23. In the “Refresh your PC without affecting your files” section, you can click the “Get started” button to
n
begin a process that will restore Windows to its default operating state without removing any data files.
24. If you plan on giving away your PC, or you want to remove all of the content on your computer and start
tio
over, you can click the “Get started” button under the “Remove everything and reinstall Windows”
section and then follow the onscreen prompts to erase and reset your computer. Note that this is an
extreme choice that will completely wipe out all of the files and settings on your computer, forcing you to
lua
start over from scratch. You should only do this if you are planning to give the computer away and only
after you have safely backed up all files and folders that you want to keep from your PC, first.
25. If you need to change the way that Windows 8.1 boots up by default, you can change the boot and
startup settings by clicking the “Restart now” button under the “Advanced startup” section. This is
va
sometimes used by computer professionals to allow Windows 8.1 to boot from an alternate device, such
as a USB dive, and is not often needed by most users.
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To be able to find various types of settings within the Windows 8.1 environment.
Exercises for Windows 8.1 Only:
es
1. Ensure that you are viewing the Start screen within Windows 8.1.
2. Roll your mouse pointer to the lower-right corner of the Start screen until the “Charm Bar” appears.
os
3. Roll your mouse pointer up to the “Settings” charm and click it to reveal the “Settings” pane at the
right side of the Start screen.
4. Click the “Change PC Settings” command at the bottom of the “Start” pane to view the settings for
rp
your computer in the “PC Settings” app window that then appears.
5. Click the “PC and devices” category at the left side of the “PC Settings” window.
Under the “Lock screen preview” section to the right, select a picture to show within the “Lock
pu
6.
Screen” by clicking the desired picture to use.
7. Click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the screen by the “PC and devices” title to
return to the main listing of settings within the “PC Settings” window.
8. Click the “Accounts” category shown at the left side of the “PC Settings” window.
n
9. Click the “Your account” category at the left side of the window to display your user account settings
tio
10. Click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner of the screen by the “PC and devices” title to
return to the main listing of settings within the “PC Settings” window.
Click and drag from the top to the bottom of the “PC Settings” window to drag it off the bottom of the
lua
11.
screen to close it
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 4-
Control Panel Settings
ly!
on
4.1- The Control Panel
4.2- Personalizing the Desktop
es
4.3- Changing Screen Resolution
os
4.4- Backup and Restore Files in Windows 8.1
rp
4.5- System Restore
pu
4.6- Audio Adjustment
4.7- Adding Devices and Printers

n
tio
4.8- Installing and Uninstalling Software
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
4.1- The Control Panel:
on
Warning: Making changes to some of the items in the control panel can seriously alter your
computer and how it functions. It may even cause the computer to not function properly. Do not
make changes to any of the settings if you do not fully understand the implications of changing the
es
settings.
The Control Panel is used to change settings in the Windows operating system and the computer. In
this screen you can change settings for the computer’s audio, monitor display, security settings, and many
os
other aspects of your computer.
To access the Control Panel from the Start screen in Windows 8.1, click the downward-pointing
arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display all of the “Apps” on your computer. Click the
“Control Panel” icon under the “Windows System” app grouping to open the Control Panel within the
rp
Desktop app. Alternately, you can open the Control Panel from within the “Desktop” app by clicking the “File
Explorer” button within the Windows 8.1 Taskbar to open a File Explorer window. Then click the “This PC”
pu
icon at the left side of the window. Then click the “Open Control Panel” button within the “Computer” tab in
the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window.
When you first open the Control Panel, you will see some of the most commonly used Control Panel
items, organized by category. To show more information about an item in the “Control Panel” while in
n
category view, hold your mouse pointer over the icon or category name and read the text that appears.
To open one of these items, click its icon or category name. Some of these items will open a list of
tio
tasks you can perform, as well as show a selection of individual Control Panel items. For example, if you
click the “Appearance and Personalization” category within the Control Panel, you will see a list of related
tasks, such as “Personalization,” along with other related Control Panel items.
lua
If you open the Control Panel and do not see the Control Panel item that you want to access, you
can click the drop-down next to the words “View by:” in the upper-right corner of the Control Panel window
and then select either “Large icons” or “Small icons” from the drop-down menu that appears to see all of the
Control Panel items displayed as either large or small icons. You can then double-click the Control Panel
va
icon of the settings that you want to change. To find out more about an item within the Control Panel window
while viewing all the icons, hold your mouse pointer over an icon and read the text that appears. You can
click the “View by:” drop-down again and then click the “Category” command to return to the “Category” view
e
of the Control Panel window.

You will find that many of the features that you can change within the Control Panel are settings that
are duplicated within the “PC Settings” panel. Note that changing the settings by using one tool set or the
or
other will still change that setting within the computer, regardless of which tool set you used to change that
setting. The “PC Settings” panel is simply the newer tool for changing your computer settings.
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
4.2- Personalizing the Desktop:
on
You can personalize your Desktop to change its appearance. You can change the background
image shown on the Desktop, the screen saver used, the sound scheme and more. To personalize the
Desktop, right-click anywhere within the empty space on the Desktop and then click the “Personalize”
es
command in the pop-up menu that appears. Alternately, you can click the “Appearance and Personalization”
link within the Control Panel window when using the “Category” view and then click the “Personalization”
link to display the same “Personalization” screen where you can change these Desktop settings.
os
Within the “Personalization” screen in the Control Panel, you can click the “Desktop Background”
hyperlink at the bottom of the window to display the “Desktop Background” screen. In this screen, you can
select a background image for your Windows Desktop. You can select a picture location from the “Picture
location” drop-down, to select from the pictures available within the selected location. You can also click the
rp
“Browse…” button to open a window that allows you to navigate to a folder that contains the image you want
to use as the background. Once you have selected a folder, the images within it will be displayed within this
pu
screen. You can then select the desired image to use for the background by clicking it. You can select
multiple pictures to display them as a slide show, if desired. At the bottom of the window, you can use the
“Picture position” drop-down select how to position the picture in the Desktop background. If you selected
multiple pictures, then use the “Change picture every:” drop-down to select how often to change the
n
background image. You can also check the “Shuffle” checkbox to shuffle the selected images within the
slide show. You can also check the “When using battery power, pause the slide show to save power”
tio
checkbox to stop the slide show when the computer is using battery power. When you are done, you can
click the “Save Changes” button to apply the new Desktop background image or images and return to the
“Personalization” screen or you can click the “Cancel” button to discard any changes and return to the
lua
“Personalization” screen.
In the “Personalization” screen, you can click the “Color” hyperlink at the bottom of the screen to
select a color to use for the Desktop. This color will be used within the File Explorer window and in the
Taskbar. In the “Color and Appearance” screen, click on a color shown to select it as the Desktop color.
va
Then use the “Color intensity:” slider to set the intensity of color selected. If you prefer, you can click the
“Show color mixer” link to display a “Hue,” Saturation,” and “Brightness” slider set that you can use to select
your color choice. When you are finished, you can click the “Save Changes” button to apply the changes to
e
the color scheme and return to the “Personalization” screen or you can click the “Cancel” button to discard
any changes and return to the “Personalization” screen.
You can click the “Sounds” hyperlink at the bottom of the “Personalization” screen to open the
or
“Sounds” tab within the “Sound” dialog box. You can select a Windows event from the listing shown in the
“Program Events” list and then choose the sound to play for that event from the “Sounds” drop-down. You
-f
can add a custom “.wav” file to play by clicking the “Browse…” button and then selecting one from the dialog
box that appears. After customizing the default sound scheme, you can click the “Save As…” button to open
a “Save Scheme As” dialog box where you can type a name for your custom sound scheme. You can then
ple
switch between the sound schemes that are available by making a choice from the “Sound Scheme” drop-
down. Click the “OK” button when you are finished here to save your changes or click the “Cancel” button to
discard your changes. Either way, you will then return to the “Personalization” screen
You can click the “Screen Saver” hyperlink at the bottom of the “Personalization” screen to open the
m
“Screen Saver Settings” dialog box. A screen saver is an animation that is displayed onscreen after a period
of inaction occurs so that the Desktop image will not be burned into the monitor due to its constant display.
Sa
Within this dialog box, use the “Screen saver” drop-down to pick the screen saver to use and then click the
“Preview” button to see how it will appear. When previewing the screen saver, you can press the “Esc” key
on your keyboard or move your mouse pointer to stop the preview. The screen saver that is currently

ly!
4.2- Personalizing the Desktop- (cont’d.):
on
selected can be adjusted by clicking the “Settings…” button. Depending on the screen saver selected, the
options of what settings you can change, if any, will vary. Make any selections you would like within the
settings dialog box and then click “OK” to return to the “Screen Saver Settings” dialog box. In the “Wait:”
es
box, you can enter the number of minutes that the computer should be inactive before the screen saver
starts. If the check box “On resume, display logon screen” is selected, the user’s login password will be
required to return to the Desktop after the screen saver has been activated. Once you have finished setting
os
the screen saver, click the “OK” button within the “Screen Saver Settings” dialog box to save your changes
or click the “Cancel” button to discard your changes.
When you are finished using the “Personalize” screen within the Control Panel, you can close the
Control Panel window by clicking the “X” in the upper right corner of the window.
rp
pu
4.3- Changing Screen Resolution:
You can change the screen resolution used by your monitor to change the available number of
pixels shown onscreen. Note that the settings available will depend on the monitor used as well as the
display driver installed. Changing the screen resolution changes the quality of the images displayed by
n
increasing resolution as well as allowing for more display area onscreen. Many applications and features
tio
have a minimum or optimal screen resolution setting to use. For example, if you choose to use the “App
snapping” feature in Windows 8.1, you must have a minimum screen resolution of 1366 x 768. These
numbers represent the number of pixels used to display the width and height of the onscreen display. In this
lua
lesson, you will learn how to access and change your screen resolution settings.
You can access your screen resolution settings by right-clicking in the empty area within your
Desktop and then clicking the “Screen resolution” command in the pop-up menu that appears. Alternately,
you can click the “Adjust screen resolution” hyperlink under the “Appearance and Personalization” category
va
within the Control Panel window when using the “Category” view.
In the “Screen Resolution” screen that appears, you can select a display to adjust, if needed, from
the display icons shown at the top of the screen. If you have multiple monitors connected to your computer,
e
you can adjust the display of each, as needed. You can also choose a display to adjust by making a
selection from the “Display” drop-down menu.
For the selected display, use the “Resolution” drop-down to select a screen resolution from the slider
or
that then appears within the drop-down menu. You can then select a display orientation from the
“Orientation” drop-down menu that appears. When you have finished changing your screen resolution, click
the “OK” button to accept the changes. Windows will preview the changes and then allow you to either keep
-f
the changes or revert back to your previous display settings in a message box that appears onscreen. If you
decide that you would like to keep the display settings, then click the “Keep changes” button. If you want to
ple
revert back to the previously used display settings, then click the “Revert” button or simply wait until the
timer expires at which point the settings will revert automatically. This is to safeguard against accidentally
setting your display at a resolution that you cannot view or use.
m
Sa

ly!
4.4- Backup and Restore Files in Windows 8.1:
on
To ensure the preservation of your computer’s data, you should backup your data by copying your
files to removable media, such as an external hard drive, network location, or USB flash drive at least once
a week. Windows 8.1 provides you with the “File History” tool that backs up your computer’s library files,
es
desktop, contacts, and favorites to an external hard drive or network location that you specify. In the event of
catastrophic data loss, you can then restore those files from the external hard drive or network location back
to your computer. Note that this feature within the Control Panel is the same as the “File History” category
os
within the “Update and recovery” category found within the “PC Settings” app window. You can set up “File
History” settings for your computer in either location.
To use the “File History” feature, first connect an external hard drive that you can use for data
storage to your computer or network. To then access the “File History” settings in the Control Panel, open
rp
the Control Panel within a File Explorer window. Then click the “Save backup copies of your files with File
History” hyperlink under the “System and Security” category within the “Category” view of the Control Panel
pu
window. Windows 8.1 will then automatically search for the connected external hard drive or network
location to use for its file backups. You will see the drive choice to use for the backup shown within the “File
History” window. If this looks like the correct drive to use, you can click the “Turn on” button to turn on the
“File History” feature and backup the selected files.
n
To select a different drive to use for the “File History” tool, click the “Select drive” hyperlink at the left
side of the “File History” window. You can then select the drive to use for the backup by clicking on your
tio
choice within the listing of available external hard drives or network locations shown within the “Select a File
History drive” pane. Then click the “OK” button at the bottom of the window to return to the “File History”
window.
lua
To change the advanced “File History” settings, you can click the “Advanced settings” command at
the left side of the “File History” window. You can then use the three drop-downs in the “Versions” section to
choose your desired settings for the “Save copies of files,” “Size of offline cache,” and “Keep saved
versions” settings. You can then click the “Save changes” button at the bottom of the window to save the
va
changes and return to the “File History” window.

If you need to restore your files, which will overwrite any existing files with the save copies, you can
click the “Restore personal files” command at the left side of the “File History” window and then select the
e
version of the files to use for the restoration within the window that appears. You can then click the
“Restore” button to restore the selected files.
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
4.5- System Restore:
on
“System Restore” is a component of Windows 8.1 that you can use to restore your computer to a
previous state if a serious problem occurs. During a system restore, you will not lose personal data files.
System Restore monitors changes to the system and automatically creates easily identifiable restore points
es
during procedures such as software installation. These restore points allow you to revert the system to a
previous time, as if you had never performed the procedure. Restore points are often created at the time of
significant system events, such as when an application or driver is installed. You can also manually create
os
and name your own restore points at any time.
To ensure that System Restore is enabled, open a File Explorer window. Select the “This PC” icon in
the left pane of the window. Then click the “System properties” button on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon
of the File Explorer window to display the “System” window. In this window, click the “System protection”
rp
hyperlink at the left side of the window to open the “System Properties” dialog box and display the “System
Protection” tab.
pu
Ensure that your computer’s “C:” drive is shown in the “Protection Settings” list at the bottom of this
tab. In Windows 8.1, this setting for the “C:” drive should be “On” under the “Protection” column.
You can manually create a restore point by clicking the “Create…” button at the bottom of the tab to
open the “Create a Restore Point” window. Here you enter a name for the restore point. The date and time
n
will be automatically added. Then click the “Create” button to create a restore point. When Windows is
finished creating the restore point, it will inform you of that fact in a small message box. Click the “OK”
tio
button in the message box to close the message box.
If you need to restore your computer to an earlier time by performing a system restore, click the
“System Restore…” button. That will open the “System Restore” window. Select the desired option button
lua
that corresponds to the restore point to which you want to restore your system. Then click the “Next” button
to continue. If you selected to use the most recent restore point, then just click the “Finish” button to restore
your system. If you elected to choose a different restore point, then select the restore point to use in the
second screen. Note that you may need to check the checkbox for “Show more restore points” to see all of
va
the available restore points. After selecting a restore point, click the “Next” button to continue and then click
the “Finish” button to restore your system.
It is important that you do not shut down the computer or interfere with it in any way until it has
e
completely finished performing the system restore. Windows will notify you when the system has been
restored to the point selected.
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
4.6- Audio Adjustment:
on
There are many ways to adjust the volume of the computer. You saw how you can click the “Audio”
icon within the “Settings” panel of the Charm Bar to adjust the audio output of your computer. You also
already saw how to set the sound scheme used by your computer within the “Personalization” section of the
es
Control Panel when personalizing your Desktop. In this lesson, you will learn how to set additional
advanced audio settings for your computer speakers and other connected audio devices through the
Control Panel.
os
To view these settings, open the Control Panel within the File Explorer window. Then click the
“Hardware and Sound” hyperlink in the Control Panel window when using the “Category” view. Then click
the “Sound” hyperlink in the “Hardware and Sound” window to open the “Sound” dialog box.
The first tab, “Playback,” allows you select the desired output device for audio playback. To set the
rp
playback properties for a selected device, click the “Properties” button. In the next dialog box that appears,
you can click the “Levels” tab and then set the volume levels using the sliders available. You can click the
pu
“OK” button when you are done to save your changes.
Back in the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the “Recording” tab to select a recording device to use
for recording audio and to configure the input levels of microphones. To set the recording properties for a
selected device, click the “Properties” button. In the next dialog box that appears, you can click the “Levels”
n
tab and then set the recording volume levels using the sliders available. Depending on the device
connected, you may also be able to set many other properties in the dialog box that appears. You can click
tio
the “OK” button when you are done to save your changes.
In the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the “Sounds” tab to select a sound scheme for Windows. A
sound scheme is a set of sounds applied to Windows events. You can select “No Sounds” or “Windows
lua
Default” from the “Sound Scheme:” drop-down. You can change individual sounds in the scheme drop-down
by clicking the item you want to change in the “Program” box and changing the sound file used in the
“Sounds” drop-down. After modifying a sound scheme you can save it as your own custom sound scheme
by clicking the “Save As…” button, typing a name for the scheme into the “Save Scheme As” dialog box,
va
and then clicking the “OK” button.

If you use your computer to place phone calls, you can click the “Communications” tab to select how
you want Windows to adjust the volume of other noises on your computer when placing calls. Choose the
e
option button that corresponds to the type of audio adjustment to make to other sounds in the computer
when pacing calls from the options shown.
After making whatever audio changes you would like within the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the
or
“OK” button to save and apply your changes or click the “Cancel” button to discard your changes.
Note that you can also change the volume of your computer by clicking the “Speakers” icon in the
-f
lower right corner of the Taskbar within the Windows Desktop and then clicking and dragging the slider that
appears up or down to set the volume of your default audio playback device. You can also click the small
“Mute” button shown at the bottom of the slider to turn muting of the sound both on and off.
ple
m
Sa

ly!
4.7- Adding Devices and Printers:
on
Most printers and other types of external, peripheral devices such as external hard drives or USB
drives will be recognized and installed automatically by Windows when you plug them into a computer. This
is the “Plug and Play” feature of Windows that allows the operating system to recognize new hardware and
es
immediately install the drivers for the new hardware if connected to the Internet. However, if you need to
manually install a printer or other peripheral device, that is also easy to do in Windows.
First, ensure that the printer or other device is turned on and connected to the computer. Then open
os
the Control Panel within the File Explorer window. Then click the “Add a device” command under the
“Hardware and Sound” hyperlink in the Control Panel window when using the “Category” view. The printer
or other external device will then appear within the window, where you can select it and then click the “Next”
rp
button to step through the hardware installation process. If installing a printer, note that printer
manufacturers will also include detailed instructions on how to install the printer as well. Make sure to read
all the printer-specific instructions before you start the installation.
pu
4.8- Installing and Uninstalling Software:
n
While you can download many apps from the Windows Store for your computer, you can also install
software from CDs or DVDs. When you insert a disk into your computer to install new software, there is
tio
often an executable file on the disk that will start the software installation process for you. You simply follow
the installation instructions shown within the installer that launches to install the software to your computer.
To manually uninstall computer software that is not an app that you downloaded from the Microsoft
lua
Store, you can open a File Explorer window. Click the “This PC” icon at the left side of the window, and then
click the “Uninstall or change a program” button in the “Computer” tab of the Ribbon at the top of the
window. In the “Programs and Features” window that appears, click the name of the installed software
application that you want to uninstall or change. Then look in the toolbar at the top of the window for a list of
va
the commands you can select. You can always click the “Uninstall” hyperlink to begin uninstalling the
software. Also, many programs may give you the option of changing the installation, or repairing the
installation. You can click whichever button you would like to begin that process.
e
Note that the process for uninstalling an app that was downloaded from the Windows Store in
Windows 8.1 differs from this process. To uninstall an installed app, right-click the app tile that you want to
uninstall within the Start screen. Then click the “Uninstall” button in the options bar that appears at the
or
bottom of the screen to remove the app from your computer.

-f
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
THE CONTROL PANEL:
on
1. Warning: Making changes to some of the items in the control panel can seriously alter your computer
and how it functions. It may even cause the computer to not function properly. Do not make changes to
any of the settings if you do not fully understand the implications of changing the settings.
es
2. To access the Control Panel from the Start screen in Windows 8.1, click the downward-pointing
arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display all of the “Apps” on your computer.
3. Click the “Control Panel” app tile under the “Windows System” apps grouping to open the Control Panel
os
within the Desktop app.
4. To open the Control Panel from within the “Desktop” app, click the “File Explorer” button within the
Windows 8.1 Taskbar to open a File Explorer window.
5. Click the “This PC” icon at the left side of the window.
rp
6. Click the “Open Control Panel” button within the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon at the top of the File
Explorer window.
pu
7. Within the Control Panel, you will see commonly used Control Panel items, organized by category.
8. To show more information about an item in the “Control Panel” while in category view, hold your mouse
pointer over the icon or category name and read the text that appears.
9. To open one of these items, click its icon or category name.
n
10. You can click the drop-down next to the words “View by:” in the upper-right corner of the Control Panel
window and then select either “Large icons” or “Small icons” from the drop-down menu that appears to
tio
see all of the Control Panel items displayed as either large or small icons.
11. You can then double-click the Control Panel icon of the settings that you want to change.
12. To find out more about an item within the Control Panel window while viewing all the icons, hold your
lua
mouse pointer over an icon and read the text that appears.
13. You can click the “View by:” drop-down again and then click the “Category” command to return to the
“Category” view of the Control Panel window.
va
PERSONALIZING THE DESKTOP:

e
1. To personalize the Desktop, right-click anywhere within the empty space on the Desktop and then click
the “Personalize” command in the pop-up menu that appears.
or
OR
1. Click the “Appearance and Personalization” link within the Control Panel window when using the
-f
“Category” view and then click the “Personalization” link to display the same “Personalization” screen.
2. Within the “Personalization” screen in the Control Panel, you can click the “Desktop Background”
ple
hyperlink at the bottom of the window to display the “Desktop Background” screen.
3. To select a background image for your Windows Desktop, select a picture location from the “Picture
location” drop-down to select from the pictures available within the selected location.
4. You can also click the “Browse…” button to open a window that allows you to navigate to a folder that
m
contains the image you want to use as the background.

5. Once you have selected a folder, the images within it will be displayed within this screen.
Sa
6. Select the desired image to use for the background by clicking it. You can select multiple pictures to
display them as a slide show, if desired.
(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
PERSONALIZING THE DESKTOP- (CONT'D.):
on
7. At the bottom of the window, you can use the “Picture position” drop-down select how to position the
picture in the Desktop background.
8. If you selected multiple pictures, then use the “Change picture every:” drop-down to select how often to
es
change the background image.
9. You can also check the “Shuffle” checkbox to shuffle the selected images within the slide show.
10. You can also check the “When using battery power, pause the slide show to save power” checkbox to
os
stop the slide show when the computer is using battery power.
11. When you are done, you can click the “Save Changes” button to apply the new Desktop background
image or images and return to the “Personalization” screen or click the “Cancel” button to discard any
changes and return to the “Personalization” screen.
rp
12. To select a color to use for the Desktop, click the “Color” hyperlink at the bottom of the
“Personalization” screen.
pu
13. In the “Color and Appearance” screen, click on a color shown to select it as the Desktop color.
14. Then use the “Color intensity:” slider to set the intensity of color selected.
15. If you prefer, you can click the “Show color mixer” link to display a “Hue,” Saturation,” and “Brightness”
slider set that you can use to select your color choice.
n
16. When you are finished, you can click the “Save Changes” button to apply the changes to the color
scheme and return to the “Personalization” screen or you can click the “Cancel” button to discard any
tio
changes and return to the “Personalization” screen.
17. To customize the Windows sound scheme, click the “Sounds” hyperlink at the bottom of the
“Personalization” screen to open the “Sounds” tab within the “Sound” dialog box.
lua
18. You can select a Windows event from the listing shown in the “Program Events” list and then choose the
sound to play for that event from the “Sounds” drop-down.
19. You can add a custom “.wav” file to play by clicking the “Browse…” button and then selecting one from
the dialog box that appears.
va
20. After customizing the default sound scheme, you can click the “Save As…” button to open a “Save
Scheme As” dialog box where you can type a name for your custom sound scheme.
21. You can then switch between the sound schemes that are available by making a choice from the
e
“Sound Scheme” drop-down.

22. Click the “OK” button when you are finished here to save your changes or click the “Cancel” button to
discard your changes. Either way, you will then return to the “Personalization” screen
or
23. To set your Windows screen saver, click the “Screen Saver” hyperlink at the bottom of the
“Personalization” screen to open the “Screen Saver Settings” dialog box.
-f
24. Within this dialog box, use the “Screen saver” drop-down to pick the screen saver to use and then click
the “Preview” button to see how it will appear.
25. When previewing the screen saver, you can press the “Esc” key on your keyboard or move your mouse
ple
pointer to stop the preview.

26. To adjust the settings of the selected screen saver, click the “Settings…” button. Depending on the
screen saver selected, the options of what settings you can change, if any, will vary. Change any
settings within the settings dialog box and click “OK” to return to the “Screen Saver Settings” dialog box.
m
27. In the “Wait:” box, you can enter the number of minutes that the computer should be inactive before the
screen saver starts.
Sa
28. If the check box “On resume, display logon screen” is selected, the user’s login password will be
required to return to the Desktop after the screen saver has been activated.
(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
PERSONALIZING THE DESKTOP- (CONT'D.):
on
29. Once you have finished setting the screen saver, click the “OK” button within the “Screen Saver
Settings” dialog box to save your changes or click the “Cancel” button to discard your changes.
30. When you are finished using the “Personalize” screen within the Control Panel, you can close the
es
Control Panel window by clicking the “X” in the upper right corner of the window.
TO CHANGE YOUR SCREEN RESOLUTION:
os
1. Right-click in the empty area within your Desktop and then click the “Screen resolution” command in the
pop-up menu that appears.
rp
OR
pu
1. Click the “Adjust screen resolution” hyperlink under the “Appearance and Personalization” category
within the Control Panel window when using the “Category” view.
2. In the “Screen Resolution” screen that appears, you can select a display to adjust, if needed, from the
display icons shown at the top of the screen. You can also choose a display to adjust by making a
n
selection from the “Display” drop-down menu.
tio
3. For the selected display, use the “Resolution” drop-down to select a screen resolution from the slider
that then appears within the drop-down menu.
4. You can then select a display orientation from the “Orientation” drop-down menu that appears.
5. When you have finished changing your screen resolution, click the “OK” button to accept the changes.
lua
6. Windows will preview the changes and then allow you to either keep the changes or revert back to your
previous display settings in a message box that appears onscreen.
7. If you decide that you would like to keep the display settings, then click the “Keep changes” button.
8. If you want to revert back to the previously used display settings, then click the “Revert” button or simply
va
wait until the timer expires at which point the settings will revert automatically.
e
BACKUP AND RESTORE IN WINDOWS 8.1:

or
1. To configure File History within the Control Panel, first connect an external hard drive that you can
use for data storage to your computer or network.
2. To then access the “File History” settings in the Control Panel, open the Control Panel within a File
-f
Explorer window.
3. Then click the “Save backup copies of your files with File History” hyperlink under the “System and
Security” category within the “Category” view of the Control Panel window.
ple
4. Windows 8.1 will then automatically search for the connected external hard drive or network location to
use for its file backups. You will see the drive choice to use for the backup shown within the “File
History” window.
5. If this looks like the correct drive to use, you can click the “Turn on” button to turn on the “File History”
m
feature and backup the selected files.

6. To select a different drive to use for the “File History” tool, click the “Select drive” hyperlink at the
Sa
left side of the “File History” window.

(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
BACKUP AND RESTORE IN WINDOWS 8.1- (CONT’D.):
on
7. You can then select the drive to use for the backup by clicking on your choice within the listing of
available external hard drives or network locations shown within the “Select a File History drive” pane.
8. Then click the “OK” button at the bottom of the window to return to the “File History” window.
es
9. To change the advanced “File History” settings, click the “Advanced settings” command at the left
side of the “File History” window.
10. You can then use the three drop-downs in the “Versions” section to choose your desired settings for the
os
“Save copies of files,” “Size of offline cache,” and “Keep saved versions” settings.
11. You can then click the “Save changes” button at the bottom of the window to save the changes and
return to the “File History” window.
rp
12. To restore your files, which will overwrite any existing files with the save copies, you can click the
“Restore personal files” command at the left side of the “File History” window and then select the version
of the files to use for the restoration within the window that appears.
pu
13. You can then click the “Restore” button to restore the selected files.
USING SYSTEM RESTORE:

n
1. To ensure that System Restore is enabled, open a File Explorer window.
tio
2. Select the “This PC” icon in the left pane of the window.
3. Click the “System properties” button on the “Computer” tab in the Ribbon of the File Explorer window to
display the “System” window.
lua
4. In this window, click the “System protection” hyperlink at the left side of the window to open the “System
Properties” dialog box and display the “System Protection” tab.
5. Ensure that your computer’s “C:” drive is shown in the “Protection Settings” list at the bottom of this tab.
In Windows 8.1, this setting for the “C:” drive should be “On” under the “Protection” column.
va
6. To manually create a restore point, click the “Create…” button at the bottom of the tab to open the
“Create a Restore Point” window.
7. Enter a name for the restore point. The date and time will be automatically added.
8. Click the “Create” button to create a restore point.
e
9. When Windows is finished creating the restore point, it will inform you of that fact in a small message
box. Click the “OK” button in the message box to close the message box.
or
10. To restore your computer to an earlier time by performing a system restore, click the “System
Restore…” button to open the “System Restore” window.
11. Select the desired option button that corresponds to the restore point to which you want to restore your
-f
system.
12. Then click the “Next” button to continue.
ple
13. If you selected to use the most recent restore point, click the “Finish” button to restore your system.
14. If you elected to choose a different restore point, then select the restore point to use in the second
screen. Note that you may need to check the checkbox for “Show more restore points” to see all of the
available restore points.
m
15. After selecting a restore point, click the “Next” button to continue and then click the “Finish” button to
restore your system.
16. It is important that you do not shut down the computer or interfere with it in any way until it has
Sa
completely finished performing the system restore. Windows will notify you when the system has been
restored to the point selected.

ACTIONS-
ly!
MAKING AUDIO ADJUSTMENTS:
on
1. To view these settings, open the Control Panel within the File Explorer window and select the
“Category” view from the “View by:” drop-down, if needed.
2. Click the “Hardware and Sound” hyperlink in the Control Panel window.
es
3. Click the “Sound” hyperlink in the “Hardware and Sound” window to open the “Sound” dialog box.
4. The first tab, “Playback,” allows you select the desired output device for audio playback.
5. To set the playback properties for a selected device, click the “Properties” button.
os
6. In the next dialog box that appears, you can click the “Levels” tab and then set the volume levels using
the sliders available.
7. You can click the “OK” button when you are done to save your changes.
8. Back in the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the “Recording” tab to select a recording device to use for
rp
recording audio and to configure the input levels of microphones.
9. To set the recording properties for a selected device, click the “Properties” button.
pu
10. In the next dialog box that appears, you can click the “Levels” tab and then set the recording volume
levels using the sliders available.
11. Depending on the device connected, you may also be able to set many other properties in the dialog
box that appears.
n
12. You can click the “OK” button when you are done to save your changes.
13. In the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the “Sounds” tab to select a sound scheme for Windows.
tio
14. You can select “No Sounds” or “Windows Default” from the “Sound Scheme:” drop-down.
15. You can change individual sounds in the scheme drop-down by clicking the item you want to change in
the “Program” box and changing the sound file used in the “Sounds” drop-down.
lua
16. After modifying a sound scheme you can save it as your own custom sound scheme by clicking the
“Save As…” button, typing a name for the scheme into the “Save Scheme As” dialog box, and then
clicking the “OK” button.
17. If you use your computer to place phone calls, you can click the “Communications” tab to select how
va
you want Windows to adjust the volume of other noises on your computer when placing calls.
18. Choose the option button that corresponds to the type of audio adjustment to make to other sounds in
the computer when pacing calls from the options shown.
e
19. After making whatever audio changes you would like within the “Sound” dialog box, you can click the
“OK” button to save and apply your changes or click the “Cancel” button to discard your changes.
20. Note that you can also change the volume of your computer by clicking the “Speakers” icon in the lower
or
right corner of the Taskbar within the Windows Desktop and then clicking and dragging the slider that
appears up or down to set the volume of your default audio playback device.
-f
21. You can also click the small “Mute” button shown at the bottom of the slider to turn muting of the sound
both on and off.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
ADDING DEVICES AND PRINTERS:
on
1. Most printers and other types of external, peripheral devices will be recognized and installed
automatically by Windows when you plug them into a computer if connected to the Internet.
2. To manually install a printer or other peripheral device, ensure that the printer or other device is
es
turned on and connected to the computer.
3. Open the Control Panel within the File Explorer window.
4. Click the “Add a device” command under the “Hardware and Sound” hyperlink in the Control Panel
os
window when using the “Category” view.
5. The printer or other external device will then appear within the window, where you can select it and then
click the “Next” button to step through the hardware installation process.
rp
6. If installing a printer, note that printer manufacturers will also include detailed instructions on how to
install the printer as well. Make sure to read all the printer-specific instructions before you start the
installation.
pu
INSTALLING AND UNINSTALLING SOFTWARE:
n
1. While you can download many apps from the Windows Store for your computer, you can also install
software from CDs or DVDs.
tio
2. When you insert a disk into your computer to install new software, there is often an executable file on
the disk that will start the software installation process for you. You simply follow the installation
instructions shown within the installer that launches to install the software to your computer.
lua
3. To manually uninstall computer software that is not an app that you downloaded from the
Microsoft Store, open a File Explorer window.
4. Click the “This PC” icon at the left side of the window, and then click the “Uninstall or change a program”
button in the “Computer” tab of the Ribbon at the top of the window.
va
5. In the “Programs and Features” window that appears, click the name of the installed software
application that you want to uninstall or change.
6. Look in the toolbar at the top of the window for a list of the commands you can select. You can always
click the “Uninstall” hyperlink to begin uninstalling the software. Also, many programs may give you the
e
option of changing the installation, or repairing the installation. You can click whichever button you
would like to begin that process.
or
7. To uninstall an app that was downloaded from the Windows Store in Windows 8.1, right-click the
app tile that you want to uninstall within the Start screen.
8. Click the “Uninstall” button in the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen to remove the app
-f
from your computer.

ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To locate the Control Panel in Windows 8.1 and change a basic color setting.
Exercises:
es
1. Click the “Desktop” app within the Start screen to open the Desktop.
2. Click the “File Explorer” button within the Taskbar in the lower-right corner of the Desktop window to
os
open the File Explorer.
3. Within the File Explorer window, click the “This PC” icon shown within the “Navigation Bar” at the left
side of the File Explorer window.
rp
4. Click the “Open Control Panel” button within the “System” button group in the “Computer” tab that
appears within the Ribbon at the top of the File Explorer window to open the “Control Panel”
pu
window.
5. Use the “View by:” drop-down in the upper-right corner of the Control Panel window to select
“Category” and display the content within the Control Panel by categories.
6. Click the “Appearance and Personalization” link within the Control Panel window.
7. Click the “Personalization” link within the Control Panel window.
n
8. Click the “Color” hyperlink at the bottom of the window to open the “Color and Appearance” screen
tio
within the Control Panel window.
9. Within the “Change the color of your window borders and taskbar” category, click a color that you
would like to apply.
Click the “Save changes” button that appears at the bottom of the “Control Panel” window to save
lua
10.
your choice.
11. Click the red “X” button in the far upper-right corner of the “Control Panel” window to close it.
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 5-
Desktop Management
ly!
on
5.1- Changing Desktop Icons
5.2- The Recycle Bin
es
5.3- Creating Desktop Shortcuts
os
5.4- Pinning Items to the Taskbar
rp
5.5- Moving and Resizing the Taskbar
pu
5.6- Setting the Date and Time Display
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Desktop Management
ly!
5.1- Changing Desktop Icons:
on
You can change the icons displayed on your Desktop in Windows 8.1. By default, you will only see
the “Recycle Bin” icon shown on the Desktop, however, you can also add icons for other items that you
frequently use to the Desktop so that you can simply double-click the Desktop icons to view them.
es
To change the Desktop icons shown, right-click in the blank area of the Desktop app and then select
the “Personalize” command from the pop-up menu to open the “Personalization” window. Alternately, you
can open the Control Panel within the File Explorer window, click the “Appearance and Personalization”
os
hyperlink, and then click the “Personalization” hyperlink to also open the “Personalization” window.
Within the “Personalization” window, click the “Change desktop icons” hyperlink shown at the left
side of the window to open the “Desktop Icon Settings” dialog box. Under the “Desktop Icons” section,
rp
check the name of any icons shown to add them to the Desktop or remove the checks from the checkboxes
to remove the icon from the Desktop. The available icons are: “Computer,” “User’s Files,” “Network,”
“Recycle Bin,” and “Control Panel.” After selecting the icons to add to the Desktop, click the “OK” button to
pu
apply your choices.
After adding the icons to the Desktop, you can double-click the icon to open the associated folder.
For example, if you added the “Control Panel” icon to the Desktop, you can double-click that icon in the
Desktop to easily open the “Control Panel” window.
n
tio
5.2- The Recycle Bin:
If you mistakenly delete a file from your computer’s “C:” drive, you can retrieve the file by using the
lua
Recycle Bin. Windows has a file deletion safeguard, called the Recycle Bin, which holds files and folders
deleted from your computer’s hard drive until you decide to empty it. When you empty the Recycle Bin,
Windows permanently deletes the items contained within it. However, if you haven’t emptied the Recycle
Bin yet, then you can retrieve the file that you sent there when you deleted it from your hard drive. Think of
va
the Recycle Bin as a paper-recycling bin. The paper that you toss into the recycling bin stays there until it is
taken away. If you needed to find a real piece of paper you had accidentally tossed in, you’d have to
rummage through the bin to find it.
e
To restore a deleted file, open the Recycle Bin by double-clicking the icon on your Windows
Desktop. Select the file or files to restore within the “Recycle Bin” window that appears. Then click the
“Restore the selected items” command in the “Restore” button group on the “Manage” tab of the “Recycle
or
Bin Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon to move the files back to their original locations in your hard
drive.
-f
You will want to empty items from your Recycle Bin periodically to save space on your computer.
When you delete items from the Recycle Bin, they are permanently removed from your computer and you
will not be able to retrieve them! For this reason, only empty the Recycle Bin when you are absolutely sure
ple
you will never need any of the files in it again.

To empty the Recycle Bin, double-click its icon on the Desktop to open the Recycle Bin window.
Then click the “Empty Recycle Bin” button in the “Manage” button group on the “Manage” tab of the
“Recycle Bin Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon. Once again, Windows will ask you with a prompt if
m
you are sure you want to permanently delete the items in the Recycle Bin. Click “Yes” to delete the items or
“No” if you are unsure.
Sa

Desktop Management
ly!
5.3- Creating Desktop Shortcuts:
on
Instead of using File Explorer to navigate through the computer’s folders to find files in your
computer, you can create a desktop shortcut that allows you to quickly open or access files, folders or
programs. A desktop shortcut is an icon on your Desktop that opens an associated program, file, or folder
es
when you double-click the icon.
To add a shortcut to the desktop, use a File Explorer window to navigate to the folder, file, or
program for which you want to create a desktop shortcut, so that the item is displayed in the right pane
os
within File Explorer. Then right-click the item for which you want to create a desktop shortcut. Roll your
mouse pointer over the “Send to” command in the pop-up menu that appears and then click the “Desktop
(create shortcut)” command in the side menu that appears. Windows will automatically add a shortcut to the
rp
selected item to the desktop.
The icon for the desktop shortcut appears within your Desktop with a small arrow in the icon’s lower
left corner. That is how you can tell that the icon is a desktop shortcut to a file, and not the actual file itself.
pu
It is fine to delete desktop shortcuts by dragging them into the Recycle Bin. That will not delete the file that
the shortcut refers to, but rather the desktop shortcut itself.
5.4- Pinning Items to the Taskbar: n

tio
The Taskbar is the thin toolbar that appears at the bottom of the Desktop within Windows 8.1. In
Windows 8.1, the “Start” button appears at the far left end of the Taskbar. After that is the area where
program shortcuts that you have been pinned to your Taskbar will appear.
lua
You can add shortcuts to the Taskbar in Windows 8.1 so that you can have single-click access to the
programs that you use most frequently. This process is referred to as “pinning” programs to the Taskbar. To
pin a program to the Taskbar, find the app tile for the app that you want to pin to the Taskbar either within
the Start screen or within the “Apps” screen that you can access by clicking the downward-pointing arrow in
va
the lower-left corner of the Start screen. Once you have located the app tile, right-click it and then click the
“Pin to taskbar” command within the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen.
To remove, or “un-pin,” app shortcuts from the Taskbar, right-click the unwanted app tile icon within
the Taskbar and then select the “Unpin this program from taskbar” command within the pop up menu that
e
appears.
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Desktop Management
ly!
5.5- Moving and Resizing the Taskbar:
on
You can move the Taskbar to any side of the Desktop that you want. It is placed at the bottom of the
screen by default, but you can easily move it or resize it, if needed. To do this, right-click anywhere within
the Taskbar and look for the “Lock the taskbar” command within the pop-up menu that appears. If there is a
es
check in front of “Lock the taskbar” command, the Taskbar is locked in place and cannot be moved until the
check is removed. Click the “Lock the taskbar” command to remove the check.
Once the Taskbar is unlocked, you can click and drag the Taskbar from its current location and drop
os
it at any one of the sides of the screen. You may resize it by placing your mouse pointer over the edge of
the Taskbar until you see a double-pointed arrow appear. You can then click and drag to make the Taskbar
taller or shorter. Note that in Windows 8.1, you cannot make the Taskbar any shorter than the buttons that
rp
appear within the Taskbar.
Once you have made any modifications that you want to keep, right-click the blank area in the
Taskbar again and select the “Lock the taskbar” command to lock the Taskbar back into place.
pu
You can also make the entire Taskbar smaller or choose to hide the display of the Taskbar entirely.
To do this, right-click the empty area within the Taskbar and then choose the “Properties” command in the
pop-up menu that appears to open the “Taskbar and Navigation Properties” dialog box. On the “Taskbar”
tab, you can check the “Use small taskbar buttons” checkbox to use small buttons within the Taskbar and
n
decrease its height onscreen. You can check the “Auto-hide the taskbar” checkbox to have Windows
automatically hide the Taskbar onscreen. You can make it appear onscreen when hidden by rolling your
tio
mouse pointer to the bottom of the Desktop screen. It will hide itself again once you move your mouse
pointer away from the bottom of the screen. After checking the options that you want the Taskbar to
possess, click the “OK” button to apply them. Note that you can also open this dialog box and uncheck
lua
either of those checkboxes, if checked, to make the Taskbar appear at its normal size or to stop hiding the
display of the Taskbar onscreen. Once again, just click the “OK” button within the “Taskbar and Navigation
Properties” dialog box when finished to apply the new settings.
va
5.6- Setting the Date and Time Display:

e
You can see the time and date displayed in the lower right corner of the Taskbar within the Desktop
app window. You can click the date/time display in the Taskbar to view the date and time settings for your
computer in a small pop-up window. In this window, you can click the “Change date and time settings…”
or
hyperlink to open the “Date and Time” dialog box where you can set the date and time.
You can click the “Change time zone…” button to open the “Time Zone Settings” dialog box where
you can select the time zone for your computer. To also adjust the time for daylight saving’s changes, check
-f
that feature at the bottom of the dialog box to enable it. Then click the “OK” button.
To manually set the date and time, click the “Change date and time…” button to open the “Date and
ple
Time Settings” dialog box. Here you select the month and year from the “Date” calendar. Then in the “Time”
area, enter the current time into the text box. Then click the “OK” button to apply the settings.
To automatically synchronize your computer’s time with an internet server, click the “Internet Time”
tab within the “Date and Time” dialog box. If your computer is set to synchronize with an Internet time
m
server, it will be displayed at the top of this tab. You can click the “Change Settings…” button to open the
“Internet Time Settings” dialog box where you can check the “Synchronize with an Internet time server”
checkbox and then select a server to synchronize with from the “Server” drop-down. You can click the
Sa
“Update now” button to update the time. You can then click the “OK” button to apply the change. When you
are finished, click the “OK” button to apply any changes made to the date and time settings.

ACTIONS-
Desktop Management
ly!
CHANGING DESKTOP ICONS:
on
1. To change the Desktop icons shown, right-click in the blank area of the Desktop app and then select
the “Personalize” command from the pop-up menu to open the “Personalization” window.
es
OR
1. Open the Control Panel within the File Explorer window, click the “Appearance and Personalization”
os
hyperlink, and then click the “Personalization” hyperlink to also open the “Personalization” window.
2. Within the “Personalization” window, click the “Change desktop icons” hyperlink shown at the left side of
the window to open the “Desktop Icon Settings” dialog box.
3. Under the “Desktop Icons” section, check the name of any icons shown to add them to the Desktop or
rp
remove the checks from the checkboxes to remove the icon from the Desktop. The available icons are:
“Computer,” “User’s Files,” “Network,” “Recycle Bin,” and “Control Panel.”
pu
4. After selecting the icons to add to the Desktop, click the “OK” button to apply your choices.
5. After adding the icons to the Desktop, you can double-click the icon to open the associated folder.
USING THE RECYCLE BIN: n

tio
1. To restore a deleted file, open the Recycle Bin by double-clicking the icon on your Windows Desktop.
2. Select the file or files to restore within the “Recycle Bin” window that appears.
3. Click the “Restore the selected items” command in the “Restore” button group on the “Manage” tab of
the “Recycle Bin Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon to move the files back to their original locations
lua
in your hard drive.

4. To empty the Recycle Bin, double-click its icon on the Desktop to open the Recycle Bin window.
5. Click the “Empty Recycle Bin” button in the “Manage” button group on the “Manage” tab of the “Recycle
va
Bin Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon.

6. Windows will ask you with a prompt if you are sure you want to permanently delete the items in the
Recycle Bin. Click “Yes” to delete the items or “No” if you are unsure.
e
ADDING AND REMOVING DESKTOP SHORTCUTS:

or
1. To add a shortcut to the desktop, use a File Explorer window to navigate to the folder, file, or program
for which you want to create a desktop shortcut, so that the item is displayed in the right pane within File
-f
Explorer.
2. Right-click the item for which you want to create a desktop shortcut.
3. Roll your mouse pointer over the “Send to” command in the pop-up menu that appears and then click
ple
the “Desktop (create shortcut)” command in the side menu that appears to automatically add a shortcut
to the selected item to the desktop.
4. To delete a desktop shortcut, click and drag the desktop shortcut into the Recycle Bin. That will not
delete the file that the shortcut refers to, but rather the desktop shortcut itself.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Desktop Management
ly!
PINNING PROGRAMS TO THE TASKBAR:
on
1. To pin a program to the Taskbar in Windows 8.1, find the app tile for the app that you want to pin to
the Taskbar either within the Start screen or within the “Apps” screen that you can access by clicking the
downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen.
es
2. Once you have located the app tile, right-click it and then click the “Pin to taskbar” command within the
options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen.
3. To remove, or “un-pin,” app shortcuts from the Taskbar, right-click the unwanted app tile icon within
os
the Taskbar and then select the “Unpin this program from taskbar” command within the pop up menu
that appears.
rp
MOVING AND RESIZING THE WINDOWS TASKBAR:
pu
1. Right-click anywhere within the Taskbar and look for the “Lock the taskbar” command within the pop-up
menu that appears. If there is a check in front of “Lock the taskbar” command, the Taskbar is locked in
place and cannot be moved until the check is removed. Click the “Lock the taskbar” command to
remove the check.
n
2. Once the Taskbar is unlocked, you can click and drag the Taskbar from its current location and drop it at
any one of the sides of the screen.
tio
3. You may resize it by placing your mouse pointer over the edge of the Taskbar until you see a double-
pointed arrow appear. You can then click and drag to make the Taskbar taller or shorter.
4. Once you have made any modifications that you want to keep, right-click the blank area in the Taskbar
lua
again and select the “Lock the taskbar” command to lock the Taskbar back into place.
5. To make the entire Taskbar smaller or choose to hide the display of the Taskbar entirely, right-click the
empty area within the Taskbar and then choose the “Properties” command in the pop-up menu that
appears to open the “Taskbar and Navigation Properties” dialog box.
va
6. On the “Taskbar” tab, you can check the “Use small taskbar buttons” checkbox to use small buttons
within the Taskbar and decrease its height onscreen.
7. You can check the “Auto-hide the taskbar” checkbox to have Windows automatically hide the Taskbar
e
onscreen. You can make it appear onscreen when hidden by rolling your mouse pointer to the bottom of
the Desktop screen. It will hide itself again once you move your mouse pointer away from the bottom of
the screen.
or
8. After checking the options that you want the Taskbar to possess, click the “OK” button to apply them.
9. You can also open this dialog box and uncheck either of those checkboxes, if checked, to make the
-f
Taskbar appear at its normal size or to stop hiding the display of the Taskbar onscreen.
10. Once again, just click the “OK” button within the “Taskbar and Navigation Properties” dialog box when
finished to apply the new settings.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Desktop Management
ly!
SETTING THE DATE AND TIME DISPLAY:
on
1. You can see the time and date displayed in the lower right corner of the Taskbar within the Desktop app
window.
2. You can click the date/time display in the Taskbar to view the date and time settings for your computer
es
in a small pop-up window.
3. In this window, you can click the “Change date and time settings…” hyperlink to open the “Date and
Time” dialog box where you can set the date and time.
os
4. You can click the “Change time zone…” button to open the “Time Zone Settings” dialog box where you
can select the time zone for your computer.
5. To also adjust the time for daylight saving’s changes, check that feature at the bottom of the dialog box
rp
to enable it.
6. Then click the “OK” button.
7. To manually set the date and time, click the “Change date and time…” button to open the “Date and
pu
Time Settings” dialog box.
8. Here you select the month and year from the “Date” calendar.
9. Then in the “Time” area, enter the current time into the text box.
10. Then click the “OK” button to apply the settings.
n
11. To automatically synchronize your computer’s time with an internet server, click the “Internet
Time” tab within the “Date and Time” dialog box.
tio
12. If your computer is set to synchronize with an Internet time server, it will be displayed at the top of this
tab.
13. You can click the “Change Settings…” button to open the “Internet Time Settings” dialog box where you
lua
can check the “Synchronize with an Internet time server” checkbox and then select a server to
synchronize with from the “Server” drop-down.
14. You can click the “Update now” button to update the time.
15. You can then click the “OK” button to apply the change.
va
16. When you are finished, click the “OK” button to apply any changes made to the date and time settings.
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
Desktop Management
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To change the display of the Taskbar within the Windows Desktop.
Exercises:
es
1. Click the “Desktop” app tile within the Start screen to open the Desktop.
2. Right-click the empty space, meaning where there are no icons, within the Taskbar.
os
3. Within the pop-up menu that appears, look for the “Lock the Taskbar” command.
4. If there is a checkmark in front of the “Lock the Taskbar” command, then click the command within
the pop-up menu to remove the checkmark.
rp
5. Click and drag the Taskbar to the top of your Desktop screen and release the left mouse button to
relocate the Taskbar to the top of the Desktop.
pu
6. Click and drag the Taskbar back down to the bottom of the Desktop.
7. To lock the Taskbar back into place, right-click an empty space in the Taskbar.
8. Click the “Lock the Taskbar” command in the pop-up menu that appears to place a checkmark in
front of it.
9. Click the time displayed at the right end of the Taskbar.
n
10. Review the date and time settings in the pop-up menu that appears.
tio
11. Click into the empty area within the Taskbar to hide the date and time settings pop-up.
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 6-
Using Apps in Windows 8.1
ly!
on
6.1- Downloading Apps from the Windows Store
6.2- Managing Files in Apps
es
6.3- Using the SkyDrive App
os
rp
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
6.1- Downloading Apps from the Windows Store:
on
With Windows 8.1, you can download apps for your computing devices from the Windows Store.
Note that you must be signed into your computer using a Microsoft Account to download apps from the
Windows Store.
es
To download an app once you have signed in using a Microsoft Account, click the “Store” icon within
the Start screen to open the Windows Store app. Here you can browse the available apps to download. You
can browse apps by category or simply review the featured apps that are displayed. You can click an app
os
that is shown within the Windows Store to read more about the selected app. On the app page shown, you
can click the “Back” button in the upper left corner to return to the last page shown. You can read the
general information about the app and then scroll to the right to read the “Details” and “Ratings and reviews”
rp
of the app. You can also see related apps that others have purchased.
To download the app, click the “Buy,” “Try” or “Install” buttons at the upper-left side of the page. Free
apps will typically just show the “Install” button and paid apps will often show the “Buy” and “Try” buttons.
pu
The “Try” button will allow you to install a trial version of the app, which you can later purchase if you want
to keep. You can also click the “Buy” button to buy and download the app immediately. You will need to
provide some form of payment to download and purchase a paid app.
Be sure to read the “Terms of Use” and any “additional terms” by clicking those hyperlinks before
n
making purchases from the Windows Store app. Note that the apps you buy are licensed, not sold, for you
to use. Typically, this license include the ability to install and use the apps on up to 81 Windows 8.1
tio
computing devices, however, you should always read the Terms of Use from each individual app provider,
which may vary.
After selecting an app to install, you will see your download and installation information temporarily
lua
appear in the upper-right corner of the screen. After your app has been downloaded and installed, a
message box will appear onscreen informing you of that fact. You can then close the Windows Store app by
clicking at the top of the app window and then dragging the app all the way to the bottom of the screen.
Also note that the Windows Store will also provide updates to the apps installed on your computer.
va
These updates can occur automatically or you can perform them manually. To enable automatic app
updates, open the “Windows Store” app and then open the Charm Bar by rolling to the upper-right or lower-
right corners of the screen. Then click the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar to see the “Settings” panel
e
for the Windows Store app. Click the “App updates” command to display the “App updates” screen. You can
then set the “Automatically update my apps” toggle switch to the “Yes” position to automatically download
and install updates for all of your apps on that computer. If this switch is set to the “No” position, you must
or
manually update your apps. Note that you can click the “Check for updates” button in this screen to check
for any available app updates. If there are any updates available, they will be shown in this screen. You can
-f
then select the updates to install and click the “Install” button that appears at the bottom of the screen to
install the updates manually. After you are finished updating your apps, you can click the “Back” arrow
button in the upper-left corner of the window to return to the previous screen in the Windows Store app.
ple
m
Sa

ly!
6.2- Managing Files in Apps:
on
You may see a new type of “Files” screen appear within apps when you perform functions such as
saving an app file, opening an app file, or selecting a file within an app. The “Files” screen that appears
within many apps allows you to quickly find, save, or open the selected type of file within your computer.
es
However, there isn’t as much standardization with how file selection is implemented within individual apps
as there is within a standard Windows component, such as the File Explorer window.
Generally, within a “Files” window, you can click or tap the drop-down arrow in the upper-left corner
os
of the window to select a folder location or library within your computer. You will see subfolders of the
selected folder or library shown as icons at the left side of the screen, with files within that folder or library
location shown to the right. You can click these folder icons to enter those folders and display their contents.
rp
Any files will be displayed to the right of the folders, if there are any folders to show. Within a selected
location, you may see other commands at the top of the window that allow you to browse the folders and
view files. For example, you can click the “Go up” command, if shown, to move one level higher within the
pu
folder hierarchy from the currently selected location. Sometimes you may see another drop-down arrow that
displays sorting options for the current folder. You can click or tap the drop-down arrow next to that
command to change how the files within the folder are sorted. For some apps, you may also see another
drop-down that filters that types of files shown within the window. You can click or tap the drop-down arrow
n
next to that command to change or select the type of files to display.
You will also see any app file management commands shown in the options bar at the bottom of the
tio
“Files” window. So, for example, if you are opening a file, you would select the file to open and then click the
“Open” or “Select” button that appears in the options bar at the bottom of the window. The buttons available
will change depending on the app. When saving an app file, you will most often enter the name that you
lua
want to give to the file into the text box shown at the bottom of the window and then click the “Save” button.
6.3- Using the SkyDrive App:

va
You can use the SkyDrive app to save files that you want to share in the “cloud” computing network
if you are signed-in to your computer using a Microsoft Account. The SkyDrive gives you 7 GB of free
e
storage space to which you can upload documents, pictures, videos, Microsoft Office files, and many other
types of files. You can access SkyDrive by clicking the “SkyDrive” app tile within the Start screen when you
are signed-in using the associated Microsoft Account.
or
Within the SkyDrive app, you will see any files you have uploaded and any folders you have created
in addition to the three default folders named “Documents,” “Pictures,” and “Public.” You can click the
folders shown to open either the “Documents,” “Pictures,” or “Public” folders. After entering a folder, you can
-f
click the “Back” arrow in the upper-left corner of the screen to return to the previous folder. Note that any
items added to the “Public” folder are shared by default with any contacts that you let view your Microsoft
ple
Account profile. You can change these settings within your Microsoft Account online, if desired. We will
show you where to change your account settings online momentarily.
To create a new folder within the selected SkyDrive folder, right-click into the blank area of the
screen or swipe up from the bottom of the screen, to display an options bar at the bottom of the app window.
m
Then click the “New Folder” button within the options bar. Type a name for the new folder into the text box
that appears above the bar and click the “Create” button to create a new SkyDrive folder.
Sa
To add files to a folder, right-click the empty area shown within the app window or swipe up from the
bottom of the app window to display an options bar at the bottom of the screen. Then click the “Add files”
button within the options bar to open an app “Files” window where you can select the files to upload to the

ly!
6.3- Using the SkyDrive App- (cont’d.):
on
selected SkyDrive folder. Click the files to upload within the “Files” window to mark them with a checkmark
and add them to a listing shown at the bottom of the “Files” window. Once you have selected the files to
upload, click the “Copy to SkyDrive” button to upload the files to the SkyDrive folder that you selected.
es
You can open a document stored within SkyDrive by simply clicking the icon of the file shown within
the SkyDrive folder window. Windows 8.1 will then open the file using the associated app or program. For
some files that are selected, you can click an “Open with” button that appears within the options bar to
os
display a pop-up listing of the available apps that you could use to open this type of file. You can click the
name of an app within this list to change the program used to open the selected file type.
If you right-click a file that you have uploaded, you can click the “Make online-only” button in the
rp
options bar to make the file only accessible when you are connected to the Internet. You then need to click
the “Make online-only” button in the pop-up box that appears to make the selected file an online-only file. If
you make a file online-only, you can right-click the file and then click the “Make offline” button in the options
pu
bar to make it available when you are not connected to the Internet again. Just click the “Make offline”
button in the pop-up box to confirm the change.
You can manage the files that you upload to your SkyDrive by right-clicking the file to manage to
select it with a checkmark and display the options bar at the bottom of the app window. The most common
n
button choices shown in the options bar are “Delete,” “Copy,” “Cut,” “Rename,” and “Paste.” If you click the
“Rename” button within the options bar, then you will need to type a new name for the selected item into the
tio
text box that appears and then click the “Rename” button to rename the item. If you select the “Delete”
button in the options bar, you will then need to click the “Delete” button in the box that appears to confirm
you want to delete the selected item. If you select the “Copy” or “Cut” buttons in the options bar then you will
lua
need to navigate to the folder you want to move the selected item into and then click the “Paste” button
within the options bar to move the file to the selected location.
You can also click the “Clear selection” button within the options bar to remove the checkmark from
a selected SkyDrive file or folder, if needed.
va
Note that if you want to view the folders within your local “This PC” folder you can click the drop-
down arrow next to the “SkyDrive” folder title in the upper-left corner of the app window and then choose the
“This PC” command to view those locations. You can then click the drop-down again and select the name of
e
your SkyDrive folder from the drop-down to return to your primary SkyDrive folder.
Note that to set default sharing preferences and other account preferences for your Microsoft
account, you must sign-in to your Windows Live account that is associated with your Microsoft Account
or
email. You can simply open Internet Explorer 11 and then visit https://profile.live.com to access your profile
and account information. You can click the drop-down in the upper-left side of the screen and the select the
-f
“SkyDrive” link at the top of the page to manage the files within your online SkyDrive folders, as well as
other online information associated with your Microsoft account.
Starting in Windows 8.1, you can also manage your SkyDrive files by using the File Explorer
ple
window. To do this, open a File Explorer window and then look for the “SkyDrive” icon in the “Navigation
Pane” at the left side of the window. You can click it to select it or any of its subfolders. You can also
navigate to other folders and then cut, copy, and paste files and folders between the local files and folders
and the “SkyDrive” files and folders as long as you are connected to the Internet and using the File Explorer
m
window. Using the File Explorer window can often be useful to delete files from the SkyDrive folders if the
SkyDrive app seems to “hang” when deleting files from the SkyDrive folders.
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
DOWNLOADING APPS FROM THE WINDOWS STORE:
on
1. You must be signed into your computer using a Microsoft Account to download apps from the Windows
Store.
2. To download an app once you have signed in using a Microsoft Account, click the “Store” icon
es
within the Start screen to open the Windows Store app.
3. Here you can browse the available apps to download. You can browse apps by category or simply
review the featured apps that are displayed.
os
4. You can click an app that is shown within the Windows Store to read more about the selected app. You
can read the general information about the app and then scroll to the right to read the “Details” and
“Ratings and reviews” of the app. You can also see related apps that others have purchased.
5. To download the app, click the “Buy,” “Try” or “Install” buttons at the upper-left side of the page. Free
rp
apps will typically just show the “Install” button and paid apps will often show the “Buy” and “Try”
buttons. The “Try” button will allow you to install a trial version of the app, which you can later purchase
pu
if you want to keep. You can also click the “Buy” button to buy and download the app immediately. You
will need to provide some form of payment to download and purchase a paid app.
6. Be sure to read the “Terms of Use” and any “additional terms” by clicking those hyperlinks before
making purchases from the Windows Store app. Note that the apps you buy are licensed, not sold, for
n
you to use. Typically, this license include the ability to install and use the apps on up to 81 Windows 8.1
computing devices, however, you should always read the Terms of Use from each individual app
tio
provider, which may vary.
7. After selecting an app to install, you will see your download and installation information temporarily
appear in the upper-right corner of the screen. After your app has been downloaded and installed, a
lua
message box will appear onscreen informing you of that fact. You can then close the Windows Store
app by clicking at the top of the app window and then dragging the app all the way to the bottom of the
screen.
8. On the app page shown, you can click the “Back” button in the upper left corner to return to the last
va
page shown.
9. To enable automatic app updates, open the “Windows Store” app and then open the Charm Bar by
rolling to the upper-right or lower-right corners of the screen.
e
10. Then click the “Settings” button within the Charm Bar to see the “Settings” panel for the Windows Store
app.
11. Click the “App updates” command to display the “App updates” screen.
or
12. You can then set the “Automatically update my apps” toggle switch to the “Yes” position to automatically
download and install updates for all of your apps on that computer. If this switch is set to the “No”
-f
position, you must manually update your apps.

13. Note that you can click the “Check for updates” button in this screen to check for any available app
updates.
ple
14. If there are any updates available, they will be shown in this screen. You can then select the updates to
install and click the “Install” button that appears at the bottom of the screen to install the updates
manually.
15. After you are finished updating your apps, you can click the “Back” arrow button in the upper-left corner
m
of the window to return to the previous screen in the Windows Store app.
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
MANAGING APP FILES:
on
1. You may see a new type of “Files” screen appear within apps when you perform functions such as
saving an app file, opening an app file, or selecting a file within an app. The “Files” screen that appears
within many apps allows you to quickly find, save, or open the selected type of file within your computer.
es
2. Generally, within a “Files” window, you can click or tap the drop-down arrow in the upper-left corner of
the window to select a folder location or library within your computer.
3. You will see subfolders of the selected folder or library shown as icons at the left side of the screen, with
os
files within that folder or library location shown to the right.
4. You can click these folder icons to enter those folders and display their contents. Any files will be
displayed to the right of the folders, if there are any folders to show.
rp
5. Within a selected location, you may see other commands at the top of the window that allow you to
browse the folders and view files. For example, you can click the “Go up” command, if shown, to move
one level higher within the folder hierarchy from the currently selected location.
pu
6. Sometimes you may see another drop-down arrow that displays sorting options for the current folder.
You can click or tap the drop-down arrow next to that command to change how the files within the folder
are sorted.
7. For some apps, you may also see another drop-down that filters that types of files shown within the
n
window. You can click or tap the drop-down arrow next to that command to change or select the type of
files to display.
tio
8. You will also see any app file management commands shown in the options bar at the bottom of the
“Files” window. So, for example, if you are opening a file, you would select the file to open and then click
the “Open” or “Select” button that appears in the options bar at the bottom of the window. The buttons
lua
available will change depending on the app.

9. When saving an app file, you will most often enter the name that you want to give to the file into the text
box shown at the bottom of the window and then click the “Save” button.
va
USING SKYDRIVE:
e
1. You can use the SkyDrive app to save files that you want to share in the “cloud” computing network if
you are signed-in to your computer using a Microsoft Account.
2. You can access SkyDrive by clicking the “SkyDrive” app tile within the Start screen when you are
or
signed-in using the associated Microsoft Account.

3. Within the SkyDrive app, you will see any files you have uploaded and any folders you have created in
addition to the three default folders named “Documents,” “Pictures,” and “Public.”
-f
4. You can click the folders shown to open either the “Documents,” “Pictures,” or “Public” folders.
5. After entering a folder, you can click the “Back” arrow in the upper-left corner of the screen to return to
ple
the previous folder.

6. Note that any items added to the “Public” folder are shared by default with any contacts that you let view
your Microsoft Account profile. You can change these settings within your Microsoft Account online, if
desired. We will show you where to change your account settings online momentarily.
m
7. To create a new folder within the selected SkyDrive folder, right-click into the blank area of the
screen or swipe up from the bottom of the screen, to display an options bar at the bottom of the window.
8. Click the “New Folder” button within the options bar and then type a name for the new folder into the text
Sa
box that appears above the bar and click the “Create” button to create a new SkyDrive folder.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
USING SKYDRIVE- (CONT’D.):
on
9. To add files to a folder, right-click the empty area shown within the app window or swipe up from the
bottom of the app window to display an options bar at the bottom of the screen.
10. Click the “Add files” button within the options bar to open an app “Files” window where you can select
es
the files to upload to the selected SkyDrive folder.
11. Click the files to upload within the “Files” window to mark them with a checkmark and add them to a
listing shown at the bottom of the “Files” window.
os
12. Once you have selected the files to upload, click the “Copy to SkyDrive” button to upload the files to the
SkyDrive folder that you selected.
13. You can open a document stored within SkyDrive by simply clicking the icon of the file shown within the
rp
SkyDrive folder window. Windows 8.1 will then open the file using the associated app or program.
14. For some files that are selected, you can click an “Open with” button that appears within the options bar
to display a pop-up listing of the available apps that you could use to open this type of file.
pu
15. Then click the name of an app within this list to change the program used to open the selected file type.
16. If you right-click a file that you have uploaded, you can click the “Make online-only” button in the options
bar to make the file only accessible when you are connected to the Internet. You then need to click the
“Make online-only” button in the pop-up box that appears to make the selected file an online-only file.
n
17. If you make a file online-only, you can right-click the file and then click the “Make offline” button in the
options bar to make it available when you are not connected to the Internet again. Just click the “Make
tio
offline” button in the pop-up box to confirm the change.
18. You can manage the files that you upload to your SkyDrive by right-clicking the file to manage to select
it with a checkmark and display the options bar at the bottom of the app window. The most common
lua
button choices shown in the options bar are “Delete,” “Copy,” “Cut,” “Rename,” and “Paste.”
19. If you click the “Rename” button within the options bar, then you will need to type a new name for the
selected item into the text box that appears and then click the “Rename” button to rename the item.
20. If you select the “Delete” button in the options bar, you will then need to click the “Delete” button in the
va
box that appears to confirm you want to delete the selected item.
21. If you select the “Copy” or “Cut” buttons in the options bar then you will need to navigate to the folder
you want to move the selected item into and then click the “Paste” button within the options bar to move
e
the file to the selected location.

22. You can also click the “Clear selection” button within the options bar to remove the checkmark from a
selected SkyDrive file or folder, if needed.
or
23. Note that if you want to view the folders within your local “This PC” folder you can click the drop-down
arrow next to the “SkyDrive” folder title in the upper-left corner of the app window and then choose the
-f
“This PC” command to view those locations.

24. You can then click the drop-down again and select the name of your SkyDrive folder from the drop-
down to return to your primary SkyDrive folder.
ple
25. To set default sharing preferences and other account preferences for your Microsoft account,
you must sign-in to your Windows Live account that is associated with your Microsoft Account email.
You can simply open Internet Explorer 11 and then visit https://profile.live.com to access your profile
and account information.
m
26. You can click the drop-down in the upper-left side of the screen and the select the “SkyDrive” link at the
top of the page to manage the files within your online SkyDrive folders, as well as other online
Sa
information associated with your Microsoft account.

(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
USING SKYDRIVE- (CONT’D.):
on
27. Starting in Windows 8.1, you can also manage your SkyDrive files by using the File Explorer
window. To do this, open a File Explorer window and then look for the “SkyDrive” icon in the
“Navigation Pane” at the left side of the window.
es
28. You can click it to select it or any of its subfolders.
29. You can also navigate to other folders and then cut, copy, and paste files and folders between the local
files and folders and the “SkyDrive” files and folders as long as you are connected to the Internet and
os
using the File Explorer window.
30. Using the File Explorer window can often be useful to delete files from the SkyDrive folders if the
SkyDrive app seems to “hang” when deleting files from the SkyDrive folders.
rp
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. There are no exercises for this chapter.
Exercises:
es
1. None
os
rp
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 7-
Creating Documents
ly!
on
7.1- Starting WordPad and Creating a New Document
7.2- Copying and Pasting Text
es
7.3- Formatting Text
os
7.4- Saving a Document
rp
7.5- Opening a Document
pu
7.6- Printing a Document
7.7- Closing a Document

n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Creating Documents
ly!
7.1- Starting WordPad and Creating a New Document:
on
In this lesson, we will explore the skill set you must acquire to create basic documents with the
WordPad program in Windows 8.1. While you will certainly have more flexibility in creating documents when
using a more sophisticated program like Microsoft Word, WordPad is included with Windows 8.1 to give all
es
users basic document creation ability. This will also introduce you to some of the basic skills in word
processing on a computer. You will learn how to create new documents, open documents you have
created, edit text, save changes and close documents.
os
First though, you must start the WordPad program. To open WordPad in Windows 8.1, click the
downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display all of the apps on your
computer. You can find the “WordPad” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the listing.
Click the app tile to start WordPad. If you prefer, you can right-click the app tile and then click either the “Pin
rp
to Start” or “Pin to taskbar” buttons in the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen to pin the app
to either location for easier access in the future.
pu
Once you open WordPad, you can instantly begin creating a new document by typing on your
keyboard into the document window. In Windows 8.1, you can click the “File” tab within the Ribbon and then
click the “New” command in the drop-down menu that appears to create a new WordPad document, if
needed.
n
Within the WordPad document, the blinking cursor shown onscreen indicates where the text that you
type into the document will appear. When the cursor comes to the end of a line, the text will wrap
tio
automatically down to the next line. Only when you want to begin a new paragraph is it necessary to press
the “Enter” key on your keyboard. Holding down the “Shift” key while pressing one of the alphabetic keys
will make uppercase letters. Holding down the “Shift” key while pressing one of the number keys will make
lua
the symbol listed at the top of the number key. You can delete characters to the left of your insertion mark,
by pressing the “Backspace” key. You can delete letters to the right of the insertion mark by pressing the
“Delete” or “Del” key. You may also delete text by clicking and dragging over it to select it and then pressing
the “Delete” or “Del” key on your keyboard.
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Creating Documents
ly!
7.2- Copying and Pasting Text:
on
You may find it useful to copy text that you have already typed into a new document or move the text
to another place within the current document. You can either move the text, or simply copy it and then paste
the copy to a new location, leaving the original text intact.
es
To move document content from one place to another, you must first select the item or text to be
moved. You can do this in WordPad by clicking and dragging over the text to select it. The selected text will
appear highlighted. Within WordPad, you can then click the “Cut” button in the “Clipboard" button group on
os
the “Home” tab of the Ribbon in Windows 8.1. The text will disappear. Then move the insertion point to the
place within the document where you want to paste the text that you just cut. Then click the “Paste” button
to paste the text that was cut.
rp
If you wanted to leave a copy of the original text intact in its original place instead of cutting it and
pasting it, you can instead copy and paste it to another location. Once again, start by selecting the text that
you want to copy to a new location. Within WordPad, you can then click the “Copy” button in the “Clipboard"
pu
button group on the “Home” tab of the Ribbon in Windows 8.1. Next, move the insertion mark to the point
within the document where you want to paste the copy of the text. Finally, click the “Paste” button to paste
the text to the selected location.
n
WordPad in Windows 8.1
tio
lua
Cut
Copy
va
Paste
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Creating Documents
ly!
7.3- Formatting Text:
on
You can change many characteristics of the appearance of all or any part of the text within your
document. You can change the font face and size of the text. You can also bold, italicize or underline text as
well as change its alignment within your document. Before you can apply any of these changes, however,
es
you must first select the text that you want to change. Click and drag over the text to select it. The text that
is selected will then receive the changes that you make to its appearance. Non-selected text will not be
changed. Once the text is selected, you can click any of the formatting buttons to apply changes to the text.
os
In Windows 8.1, the text formatting buttons all appear within the “Font” and “Paragraph” button
groups on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon above the document window.
“Font family” is the first drop-down choice. Click this drop-down to see and select the typeface you
want to use for the text. Click the “Font Size” drop-down to select a font size, or click into the box and type
rp
the size of the font you want. Clicking the “Bold” button makes the selected text wider and darker. Clicking
the “Italic” button will slant the selected text to the right. Clicking the “Underline” button will place a line
pu
under the selected text. By clicking the “Text Color” drop-down button, you can open a color selector drop-
down menu and change the color of the selected text by clicking the desired color in the menu that appears.
You can set text alignment using the buttons in the “Paragraph” button group on the “Home” tab in
the Ribbon. Clicking any of the alignment buttons will change the alignment of the selected text. The four
n
alignments buttons are “Align text left,” “Center,” “Align text right” and “Justify.” The “Justify” alignment
aligns both the right and left sides of a paragraph, except for the last line, which is left-aligned. In this same
tio
button group is the “Start a list” button. By highlighting lines of text that have a paragraph mark (made by
pressing the “Enter” key at the end of each line in the list) between them and then clicking this button, you
can add bullet symbols to the start of each line within a typed list of items.
lua
Formatting buttons in WordPad in Windows 8.1

va
Font Family
Font Size Align text left Start a list
e
or
Bold Italic Underline Text Color Center Align text right Justify
-f
ple
m
Sa

Creating Documents
ly!
7.4- Saving a Document:
on
After you have entered or edited text, or made any change to a document that you want to keep, you
should save the document. When you save a document for the first time, you must use the “Save As” dialog
box. Doing this gives WordPad a location to which the document will be saved and a file name. Give it a
es
name that you will remember and be sure to remember where you saved it.
You can access the “Save As” dialog box by clicking the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar
at the top of a previously unsaved document. In the “Save As” dialog box that then appears, navigate to the
os
folder where you want to save the document. Then in the “File name:” text box, enter a name for the file.
Then click the “Save” button in the dialog box to save it.
Once you’ve named the file and saved it, its name will appear in the title bar. When you go to save
the document again by clicking the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar in the future, you will not have
rp
to re-enter the name and location. It will save itself automatically to the same place with the same name.
pu
7.5- Opening a Document:
To open a document in WordPad, you first must know where the file is located and the name of the
file. In Windows 8.1, click the “File” tab in the Ribbon, and then click the “Open” button to launch the “Open”
n
dialog box. Use the “Open” dialog box to navigate to the folder that contains the file that you want to open.
tio
When you see the document file that you want to open in the main window of the dialog box, click it once to
select it and then click the “Open” button in the lower right corner of the “Open” dialog box. The document
will then open in WordPad.
lua
7.6- Printing a Document:
You can print a document that you have opened in WordPad. In Windows 8.1, click the “File” tab
va
within the Ribbon and then click the “Print” command button to launch the “Print” dialog box. In this dialog
box, select the printer to use, if you have more than one, from the “Select Printer” area.
In the “Page range” section, select either the option for “All,” which will print the entire document;
e
“Pages,” which prints the pages that you type into the text box, or “Selection,” which prints only the text that
you have highlighted before opening this dialog box. In the “Copies” section, enter the number of copies you
or
want to print, and check the “Collate” checkbox to print them collated. When you are ready to print, click the
“Print” button to print the document with the settings that you specified.
-f
7.7- Closing a Document:

ple
After you have saved your document, you can close it by simply clicking the “X” in the upper-right
corner of the “WordPad” application window to close it.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Creating Documents
ly!
STARTING WORDPAD:
on
1. To open WordPad in Windows 8.1, click the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the
Start screen to display all of the apps on your computer.
2. You can find the “WordPad” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the listing.
es
3. Click the app tile to start WordPad.
4. If you prefer, you can right-click the app tile and then click either the “Pin to Start” or “Pin to taskbar”
buttons in the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen to pin the app to either location for
os
easier access in the future.
5. Once you open WordPad, you can instantly begin creating a new document by typing on your keyboard
into the document window.
6. In Windows 8.1, you can click the “File” tab within the Ribbon and then click the “New” command in the
rp
drop-down menu that appears to create a new WordPad document, if needed.
7. Within the WordPad document, the blinking cursor shown onscreen indicates where the text that you
pu
type into the document will appear.
8. When the cursor comes to the end of a line, the text will wrap automatically down to the next line.
9. To begin a new paragraph, press the “Enter” key on your keyboard.
10. Holding down the “Shift” key while pressing one of the alphabetic keys will make uppercase letters.
n
11. Holding down the “Shift” key while pressing one of the number keys will make the symbol listed at the
top of the number key.
tio
12. You can delete characters to the left of your insertion mark, by pressing the “Backspace” key.
13. You can delete letters to the right of the insertion mark by pressing the “Delete” or “Del” key.
14. You may also delete text by clicking and dragging over it to select it and then pressing the “Delete” or
lua
“Del” key on your keyboard.
COPYING AND PASTING TEXT:

va
1. To move document content from one place to another, select the item or text to be moved. You can
do this in WordPad by clicking and dragging over the text to select it. The selected text will appear
e
highlighted.
2. Click the “Cut” button in the “Clipboard" button group on the “Home” tab of the Ribbon in Windows 8.1.
The text will disappear.
or
3. Move the insertion point to the place within the document where you want to paste the text that you just
cut.
4. Click the “Paste” button to paste the text that was cut.
-f
5. To copy and paste content from one place to another, select the text that you want to copy to a new
location.
ple
6. Click the “Copy” button in the “Clipboard" button group on the “Home” tab of the Ribbon in Windows 8.1.
7. Move the insertion mark to the point within the document where you want to paste the copy of the text.
8. Click the “Paste” button to paste the text to the selected location.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Creating Documents
ly!
FORMATTING TEXT:
on
1. Click and drag over the text that you want to format to select it. The text that is selected will then receive
the changes that you make to its appearance. Non-selected text will not be changed.
2. Once the text is selected, you can click any of the formatting buttons to apply changes to the text.
es
3. In Windows 8.1, the text formatting buttons all appear within the “Font” and “Paragraph” button groups
on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon above the document window.
4. You can click the “Font family” drop-down to see and select the typeface you want to use for the text.
os
5. You can click the “Font Size” drop-down to select a font size, or click into the box and type the size of
the font you want.
6. You can click the “Bold” button to make the selected text wider and darker.
7. You can click the “Italic” button to slant the selected text to the right.
rp
8. You can click the “Underline” button to place a line under the selected text.
9. You can click the “Text Color” drop-down button to open a color selector drop-down menu and change
pu
the color of the selected text by clicking the desired color in the menu that appears.
10. You can set text alignment using the buttons in the “Paragraph” button group on the “Home” tab in the
Ribbon.
11. You can click any of the alignment buttons to change the alignment of the selected text. The four
n
alignments buttons are “Align text left,” “Center,” “Align text right” and “Justify.” Clicking the “Justify”
alignment aligns both the right and left sides of a paragraph, except for the last line, which is left-
tio
aligned.
12. To create a bulleted list, select lines of text that have a paragraph mark (made by pressing the “Enter”
key at the end of each line in the list) between them and then clicking the “Start a list” button.
lua
SAVING A WORDPAD DOCUMENT:

va
1. To save a document for the first time, you must use the “Save As” dialog box to give WordPad a location
to which the document will be saved and a file name.
2. You can access the “Save As” dialog box by clicking the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar at
e
the top of a previously unsaved document.

3. In the “Save As” dialog box that then appears, navigate to the folder where you want to save the
document.
or
4. Enter a name for the file into the “File name:” text box.
5. Click the “Save” button in the “Save As” dialog box to save it.
-f
6. After the document has been saved, its name will appear in the title bar. When you save change to the
document in the future by clicking the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar, you will not have to re-
enter the name and location. It will save itself automatically to the same place with the same name.
ple
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Creating Documents
ly!
OPENING A WORDPAD DOCUMENT:
on
1. To open a document in WordPad, you must know where the file is located and the name of the file.
2. Click the “File” tab in the Ribbon, and then click the “Open” button to launch the “Open” dialog box.
3. Use the “Open” dialog box to navigate to the folder that contains the file that you want to open.
es
4. When you see the document file that you want to open in the main window of the “Open” dialog box,
click it once to select it and then click the “Open” button in the lower right corner of the “Open” dialog
box.
os
5. The document will then open in WordPad.
PRINTING A DOCUMENT:
rp
1. Click the “File” tab within the Ribbon and then click the “Print” command button to open the “Print” dialog
pu
box.
2. Select the printer that you want to use, if you have more than one, from the “Select Printer” area.
3. In the “Page range” section, select either the option for “All,” which will print the entire document;
“Pages,” which prints the pages that you type into the text box, or “Selection,” which prints only the text
that you have highlighted before opening this dialog box.
n
4. In the “Copies” section, enter the number of copies you want to print and check the “Collate” checkbox
tio
to print them collated.
5. When you are ready to print, click the “Print” button to print the document.
lua
CLOSING A DOCUMENT:
1. After you have saved your document, you can close it by simply clicking the “X” in the upper-right corner
of the “WordPad” application window to close it.
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
Creating Documents
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To create, edit, save, and print a basic document in WordPad.
Exercises:
es
1. To open WordPad in Windows 8.1, click the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the
Start screen of the screen to display all of the apps on your computer.
os
2. Find the “WordPad” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the app listing.
3. Click the app tile to start WordPad.
4. Type any text that you desire into the main document shown in WordPad.
rp
5. Highlight a portion of the text you entered and click the “Copy” button in the “Clipboard” button group
on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
Click into a different place within your document and then click the “Paste” button in the “Clipboard”
pu
6.
button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
7. Highlight a portion of the text that you have typed within the document and then click the “Font
family” drop-down within the “Font” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
8. Select a different font from the drop-down list of fonts shown in the drop-down menu that appears.
n
9. With the same text still selected, click the “Font size” drop-down within the “Font” button group on
tio
the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
10. Select a different font size from the drop-down menu of choices that appears.
11. With the same text still selected, click the “Bold” button within the “Font” button group on the “Home”
lua
tab within the Ribbon to bold the selected text.

12. With the same text still selected, click the “Bold” button again within the “Font” button group on the
“Home” tab within the Ribbon to remove the bolding you just applied from the selected text.
13. Click the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the application window to open the
“Save As” dialog box.
va
14. Type “Test” into the “File name” text box at the bottom of the “Save As” dialog box.
15. Click the “Save” button in the “Save As” dialog box to save your document and close the dialog box.
16. Click the close button (“X”) in the upper-right corner of the WordPad title bar.
e
17. Open the WordPad application again within Windows 8.1. Use steps #1 - #3 above to help you, if
needed.
or
18. Click the “File” tab in the Ribbon of the “WordPad” window and then click the “Open” button to
launch the “Open” dialog box.
19. Use the “Open” dialog box find the “Test” file and select the file by clicking it once.
-f
20. Click the “Open” button within the “Open” dialog box to open the “Test” file again.
21. Click the “File” tab within the Ribbon and then click the “Print” command button to launch the “Print”
ple
dialog box.
22. Make any printing selections that you need, and then click the “Print” button to send the document to
your selected printer.
23. Click the “X” in the upper right corner of the WordPad application to close it.
m
Sa

CHAPTER 8-
Drawing Pictures
ly!
on
8.1- Starting Paint and Creating a New Document
8.2- Drawing Shapes and Lines
es
8.3- Adding Text
os
8.4- Erasing Parts of a Picture
rp
8.5- Saving a Picture
pu
8.6- Opening a Picture
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Drawing Pictures
ly!
8.1- Starting Paint and Creating a New Document:
on
In this lesson, we will explore the skill set you must acquire to create and edit basic image files with
the Paint program in Windows. This will also introduce you to some of the basic skills in working with
graphics on a computer. We will explore creating new images, editing images, and saving changes to the
es
image files.
First though, you must start the Paint program. To open Paint in Windows 8.1, click the downward-
pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start screen to display all of the apps on your computer. You
os
can find the “Paint” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the listing. Click the app tile to
start Paint. If you prefer, you can right-click the app tile and then click either the “Pin to Start” or “Pin to
taskbar” buttons in the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen to pin the app to either location
rp
for easier access in the future.
Once you open Paint, you can immediately begin creating a new image. If you need to create a new
document when using Paint in Windows 8.1, you can click the “File” tab within the Ribbon and then click the
pu
“New” command in the drop-down menu that appears to create a new Paint document.
8.2- Drawing Shapes and Lines:

n
When opened, Paint shows a blank image document, by default. Here you can draw new shapes by
tio
first clicking the desired “Shapes” button to draw within the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the
Ribbon. You must then select the fill style of the shape you are about to draw by clicking the “Fill” drop-
down button in the “Shapes” button group in the “Home” tab of the Ribbon and then making a selection from
lua
the drop-down menu of choices that appears. You must then select the outline style of the shape you are
about to draw by clicking the “Outline” drop-down button in the “Shapes” button group in the “Home” tab of
the Ribbon and then making a selection from the drop-down menu of choices that appears.
To then set the fill and outline colors of the shape you are about to draw, click the “Color 1” button in
va
the “Colors” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon and then click a color within the color palette to
the right of that button within the “Colors” button group to set the foreground, or line color, of the shape that
you are about to draw. Then the “Color 2” button in the “Colors” button group on the “Home” tab in the
e
Ribbon and then click a color in the color palette that appears to the right within the “Colors” button group to
select the color that you want to use as the background, or fill color, for the shape that you are about to
draw.
or
Once you have selected the settings that you prefer, click and drag within the image file to draw a
shape with the fill, line and color settings that you selected. Note that you can hold down the “Shift” key on
-f
your keyboard as you click and drag to draw a shape that maintains its proportions without warping the
shape.
To draw a line, click the “Line” button within the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the
ple
Ribbon. Then set the foreground, or line, color just as you would when drawing any other shape. Then click
and drag from start to finish where you want the line to appear. As when drawing other shapes, you can
hold down the “Shift” key on your keyboard as you click and drag to draw the line to create a straight line.
m
Sa

Drawing Pictures
ly!
8.3- Adding Text:
on
To add text to an image, click the “Text” button in the “Tools” button group on the “Home” tab in the
Ribbon. Then click into the image at the point where you want the text to appear. This will make a small text
box for the text and place an insertion mark into the text box. Type the text that you want the text box to
es
contain. To resize the text box, if needed, place your mouse pointer over one of the eight small white
squares that appear on the border of the text box until you see a double-pointed arrow appear. At that point,
click and drag in either direction shown by the arrows to resize the text box in that direction. To move the
os
text box, if needed, place your mouse pointer over the border of the text box anyplace where there is not
one of the eight small white squares showing. Your mouse pointer will turn into a four-pointed arrow when
you are in a correct location. At that point, click and drag to move the text box within the image.
rp
You can also click and drag over the text within the text box to select it and then use the buttons that
appear within the “Text Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon to set the font family, font size, bolding,
italics, or underlining by clicking those buttons. When you are finished creating and formatting the text within
pu
the text box, click outside of the text box into the canvas area of the image document to set the text.
8.4- Erasing Parts of a Picture:

n
To use the “Eraser” tool, click the “Eraser” button in “Tools” button group on the “Home” tab within
tio
the Ribbon and then select an eraser size from “Size” drop-down to the left of the “Colors” button group on
the “Home” tab in the Ribbon. You should then choose the background color of the document, which is
usually white, as the “Color 2,” or fill color choice, for this tool. Note that the “Eraser” tool really just applies
lua
the background color choice, versus actually erasing content. So pick the color that is the same as the
background of the image file for the “Color 2” choice, just as you did when drawing shapes. Then click and
drag over the parts of the picture that you want to “erase” to remove them by applying the “Color 2” choice.
va
8.5- Saving a Picture:
To save a picture file for the first time, click the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar at the top
e
of the Paint application window to launch the “Save As” dialog box. Navigate to the folder where you want to
save the file within this dialog box. Then enter a name for the image file into the “File name:” text box. When
or
you are ready, click the “Save” button within the dialog box to save the file.
-f
8.6- Opening a Picture:
To open a picture you have saved in Windows 8.1, open the Paint program and then click the “File”
ple
tab in the Ribbon. Then click the “Open” button in the drop-down menu to launch the “Open” dialog box.
Use the “Open” dialog box to select the folder that contains the image file you want to open. When
you see the image file you want to open in the main window of the dialog box, click it once to select it, and
then click the “Open” button in the lower right corner of the “Open” dialog box.
m
Sa

ACTIONS-
Drawing Pictures
ly!
TO START PAINT AND CREATE NEW DOCUMENTS:
on
1. To open Paint in Windows 8.1, click the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start
screen to display all of the apps on your computer.
2. You can find the “Paint” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the listing.
es
3. Click the app tile to start Paint.
4. If you prefer, you can right-click the app tile and then click either the “Pin to Start” or “Pin to taskbar”
buttons in the options bar that appears at the bottom of the screen to pin the app to either location for
os
easier access in the future.
5. Once you open Paint, you can begin immediately begin creating a new image.
6. If you need to create a new document when using Paint in Windows 8.1, you can click the “File” tab
within the Ribbon and then click the “New” command in the drop-down menu that appears to create a
rp
new Paint document.
pu
TO DRAW LINES AND SHAPES:
1. To draw new shapes, click the desired “Shapes” button to draw within the “Shapes” button group on
the “Home” tab in the Ribbon. n
2. Select the fill style of the shape you are about to draw by clicking the “Fill” drop-down button in the
tio
“Shapes” button group in the “Home” tab of the Ribbon and then making a selection from the drop-down
menu of choices that appears.
3. Select the outline style of the shape you are about to draw by clicking the “Outline” drop-down button in
lua
the “Shapes” button group in the “Home” tab of the Ribbon and then making a selection from the drop-
down menu of choices that appears.
4. To set the outline color of the shape you are about to draw, click the “Color 1” button in the “Colors”
button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon and then click a color within the color palette to the right
va
of that button within the “Colors” button group to set the foreground, or line color, of the shape that you
are about to draw.
5. To set the fill color of the shape you are about to draw, click the “Color 2” button in the “Colors” button
e
group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon and then click a color in the color palette that appears to the right
within the “Colors” button group to select the color that you want to use as the background, or fill color,
for the shape that you are about to draw.
or
6. Then click and drag within the image file to draw a shape with the fill, line and color settings that you
selected.
7. You can hold down the “Shift” key on your keyboard as you click and drag to draw a shape that
-f
maintains its proportions without warping the shape.

8. To draw a line, click the “Line” button within the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the
ple
Ribbon.
9. Then set the foreground, or line, color just as you would when drawing any other shape. See step #4
above if you need assistance in doing this.
10. Then click and drag from start to finish where you want the line to appear.
m
11. You can hold down the “Shift” key on your keyboard as you click and drag to draw the line to create a
straight line.
Sa

ACTIONS-
Drawing Pictures
ly!
TO ADD TEXT:
on
1. Click the “Text” button in the “Tools” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon.
2. Click into the image at the point where you want the text to appear to make a small text box for the text
and place an insertion mark into the text box.
es
3. Type the text that you want the text box to contain.
4. To resize the text box, place your mouse pointer over one of the eight small white squares that appear
on the border of the text box until you see a double-pointed arrow appear.
os
5. Then click and drag in either direction shown by the arrows to resize the text box in that direction.
6. To move the text box, place your mouse pointer over the border of the text box anyplace where there
is not one of the eight small white squares showing. Your mouse pointer will turn into a four-pointed
rp
arrow when you are in a correct location.
7. Then click and drag to move the text box within the image.
8. You can also click and drag over the text within the text box to select it and then use the buttons that
pu
appear within the “Text Tools” contextual tab within the Ribbon to set the font family, font size, bolding,
italics, or underlining by clicking those buttons.
9. When you are finished creating and formatting the text within the text box, click outside of the text box
into the canvas area of the image document to set the text.
n
tio
TO USE THE ERASER TOOL:
1. Click the “Eraser” button in “Tools” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
lua
2. Select an eraser size from “Size” drop-down to the left of the “Colors” button group on the “Home” tab in
the Ribbon.
3. Choose the background color of the document, which is usually white, as the “Color 2,” or fill color
choice, for this tool.
va
4. Click and drag over the parts of the picture that you want to “erase” to remove them by applying the
“Color 2” choice.
e
TO SAVE A PICTURE:
or
1. Click the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the Paint application window to launch
the “Save As” dialog box.
-f
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file.

3. Enter a name for the image file into the “File name:” text box.
4. Click the “Save” button within the dialog box to save the file.
ple
TO OPEN A PICTURE:
m
1. Click the “File” tab in the Ribbon and then click the “Open” button in the drop-down menu to launch the
“Open” dialog box.
2. Select the folder that contains the image file you want to open.
Sa
3. When you see the image file you want to open in the main window of the dialog box, click it once to
select it, and then click the “Open” button in the lower right corner of the “Open” dialog box.

EXERCISES-
Drawing Pictures
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To create and save a basic image file in Windows Paint.
Exercises:
es
1. Open Paint in Windows 8.1 by clicking the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the
Start screen of the screen to display all of the apps on your computer.
os
2. You can find the “Paint” app under the “Windows Accessories” app group within the listing.
3. Click the app tile to start Paint
4. Click the “Oval” shape in the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to select it.
rp
5. Click the “Color 1” choice in the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to select it.
6. Click the “Black” color cube within the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to
pu
select it as the outline color.
7. Click the “Color 2” choice in the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to select it.
8. Click the “Red” color cube within the “Shapes” button group on the “Home” tab in the Ribbon to
select it as the fill color.
9. Click and drag within the canvas area of the image document to draw a circle in the screen.
n
10. Click the “Text” button within the “Tools” button group on the “Home” tab within the Ribbon.
tio
11. Click into the area of the image where you want the text to appear to place a small text box.
12. Type the text you want to have appear into the text box
13. Click the “Save” button in the Quick Access toolbar at the top of the “Paint” application to open the
“Save As” dialog box.
lua
14. Click into the “File name:” text box at the bottom of the “Save As” dialog box and then type a name
for the file into the text box
15. Click the “Save” button within the “Save As” dialog box to save the image file and exit the “Save As”
va
dialog box.
16. Click the “X” button in the upper right corner of the “Paint” window’s title bar to close it.
e
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 9-
Using the Internet
ly!
on
9.1- About the Internet
9.2- Using the Desktop Internet Explorer 11
es
9.3- Using the Internet Explorer 11 App
os
9.4- Connecting to the Internet
rp
9.5- Windows Defender in Windows 8.1
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Using the Internet
ly!
9.1- About the Internet:
on
The Internet is a collection of connected networks around the globe that share a common address
scheme. The Internet began in 1962 as a computer network for the U.S. military, and over time has grown
into a global communication tool. By design the Internet is decentralized. Each computer on the Internet is
es
independent of each other. The operators of these computers can choose which Internet services to use
and which local services to make available to the Internet community as a whole. There are a variety of
ways to access the Internet. Most gain access through a commercial Internet Service Provider (ISP).
os
The World Wide Web is one part of the Internet, and the one with which most people are familiar.
The World Wide Web is a collection of connected computers that store documents that are known as web
pages. A collection of web pages for one topic, person, or company is called a web site. Web pages can
contain images, animations, interactive forms, games, links (called “hyperlinks”) that can take you to other
rp
web sites or web pages, and programming scripts that can allow you to enter, store, and manipulate data
and information from a remote location.
pu
When you want to open a new web page on the World Wide Web, you usually click some form of a
hyperlink to open the new web page that is referred to by the hyperlink. Hyperlinks are often text
descriptions that are usually of a different font style and color than most of the normal informative text on a
web page. Quite often hyperlinks will appear as blue, underlined text, however almost any text or image
n
within a page could potentially be used as a hyperlink.
When you click a hyperlink, you invoke the URL address stored within the hyperlink. URL stands for
tio
“Uniform Resource Locator." This URL address is where the web page that you want to view is stored on
the World Wide Web. So when you click a hyperlink, the associated URL address is interpreted by the web
browser and used to take you to the web page designated by that URL address, which then displays itself in
lua
your web browser, like Internet Explorer.

This process of jumping to interrelated web sites is known as browsing the Internet, or more
typically: “surfing the net.” You use a web browser to view these different pages by translating the
programming language used to write the web page, such as HTML, XHTML, or DHTML, into the displayed
va
information that you see on your web browser’s screen. HTML and its related languages are the interactive
document languages used to write web pages. HTML documents, which stands for “Hypertext Markup
Language,” support what is called HTTP, or “Hypertext Transport Protocol,” to make linking and viewing
e
multiple web pages possible.

or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Using the Internet
ly!
9.2- Using the Desktop Internet Explorer 11:
on
A “web browser” is a software application used to make navigating the Internet easy for the user by
providing a graphical user interface, so the user can click menus, icons, or buttons rather than learning
difficult computer commands. It is also called a “web client” because the browser application resides on the
es
client computer, or the computer of the individual using it, rather than residing on a web server.
Internet Explorer is a web browser made by Microsoft that allows the user to view web pages when
they are connected to the Internet. Internet Explorer is installed on most computers with a Windows
os
operating system. You can easily identify the browser by its icon. Internet Explorer’s icon is a large blue “e.”
You will see a button for it appear in your Taskbar within the Desktop app in Windows 8.1. To open the
desktop version of Internet Explorer 11 in Windows 8.1, click the button in the Taskbar.
rp
When the browser window opens you will find the window to be similar to many of the other windows
you have opened. There is a “Title Bar” at the very top of the window that contains the three buttons you
can use to “Minimize," “Maximize,” and “Close” the browser located at the far right end. At the far left end
pu
are the “Back” and “Forward” navigation buttons that allow you move back and forward through the web
pages you have visited. The large white text box to the right of those two buttons is called the “Address
Bar.” This bar displays the web page address of the web page currently displayed on your screen. You can
type the address of any page you want to view here and either click the “Go to” button, which is displayed
n
as an arrow button at the end of the Address Bar, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard to go to the
web page address you entered. The web page will then be displayed within the tab that appears to the right
tio
of the Address Bar.
In the center of the window is where you will view the content of the web page. Often you will find
scroll bars at the right and bottom of this area that allow you to scroll through the web page to see the
lua
entirety of the web page.

While you may enter web page addresses into the Address Bar to visit web sites you are familiar
with, you may also need to search the web for web pages that may contain content for which you are
searching. To do this in Internet Explorer 11, which comes with Windows 8.1, type the words or phrases for
va
which you want to find matching web pages directly into the “Address Bar.” Then click the “Go to” button, or
press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to display a search results web page that shows hyperlinks of web
pages that may contain content related to the terms for which you searched. You can click these hyperlinks
e
to view the associated web pages. As you move from page to page, you can use the “Back” and “Forward”
buttons in the upper left corner of the window to move back to the results of the web search.
You can right-click a web page tab shown at the top of the window and then select the “New tab”
or
command from the pop-up menu that appears to open a new web page on a separate tab within Internet
Explorer 11. You can then click between the open tabbed windows within the web browser window, so you
-f
can easily keep information from multiple web pages in view. You can close any tabbed page within the
program by clicking the small “x” button at the right end of any tab shown.
If you are trying to find specific text within a web page displayed within Internet Explorer, click the
ple
“Tools” button. This is the button that look like a cog and is displayed in the upper-right corner of the
window. After clicking this button, roll down to the “File” command in the drop-down menu that appears, and
then click the “Find on this page” command in the side menu that appears. Doing that will open a “Find” bar
at the top of the window, below the “Address Bar,” where you can enter the text to find on the page into the
m
“Find” text box. You can then click the “Previous” and “Next” buttons to jump to the different occurrences of
the text within the page. You can then click the “x” button at the left end of the “Find” bar to close it when
Sa
you are finished.

Using the Internet
ly!
9.3- Using the Internet Explorer 11 App:
on
Internet Explorer 11 behaves differently as an app that you can access from the Start screen than
its Desktop counterpart does. The app cannot install “add-ons” that enable the display of some web content,
such as Adobe Flash. Therefore, if you cannot view a web page correctly using the Internet Explorer 11
es
app, then you can open the web page using the Desktop version which will allow you to install the “add-ons”
necessary to correctly view the web page content.
You can click the Internet Explorer 11 app tile in the Start screen to open a new browser window. At
os
the bottom of the browser window you will see a black bar that contains the buttons you need to view web
pages. The buttons you will see from left to right are the “Back” button, the application or web page icon, the
“Address Bar,” the “Refresh” button, the “Tabs” button, the “Favorites” button, the “Page tools” button, and
the “Forward” button.
rp
To view a web page, type the desired URL address (example: http://www.teachucomp.com) into the
“Address Bar.” When you have finished typing the URL, you can either press the “Enter” key on your
pu
keyboard, or tap or click the “Go” arrow button that appears at the right end of the “Address Bar” when you
begin typing the URL. Also note that as you begin typing the URL address, Internet Explorer 11 will display
web pages that it thinks you may want to visit, based on what you type and web pages that you have
previously visited, as icons shown above the address bar. If one of these suggestions shows the URL that
n
you want to visit, you can click or tap on the icon shown to display that web page in the web browser
window instead of finishing typing the full URL address.
tio
As you view the different web pages within the browser window, you can use the buttons in the
black bar at the bottom of the page to help you navigate through the pages you have visited. You can click
the “Back” button to return to the previously viewed web page. If you click the “Back” button, you can click
lua
the “Forward” button to move forward to the web page you left. You can click the “Refresh” button to refresh
the content shown within the web page, if needed. If you click into the content of the web page, the black
bar at the bottom of the page will turn into a very thin line with three white dots displayed towards the right
end. This allows you to completely remove the black bar from the display to create a more immersive
va
experience when you are browsing the web. You can place your mouse pointer at the very bottom of the
screen until the line color changes slightly and then click to display the black bar again.
You can click the “Tabs” button to reveal the “Tabs” section which will display any web pages within
e
any open tabs or to open a new tab within which you can display another web page. You can also right-click
within a web page to quickly view the “Tabs” section, if desired. To open a new tab, click the “New tab”
button in the “Tabs” section, which looks like a plus sign, to display a new tab. You can then enter the web
or
page to view into the Address Bar to display the web page within the new tab. You can then switch between
the opened tabs by displaying the “Tabs” section once again. The opened tabs will be displayed as icons at
-f
the left side of this section. You can simply click the icon of the page to view it onscreen. You can then click
into the page to hide the “Tabs” section again. To close a tab, display the “Tabs” section and then click the
small “X” button in the lower-right corner of the tab icon that you want to close. The tab icon will then
ple
disappear. To reopen a closed tab, click the “Tab tools” button and then select the “Reopen closed tab”
command from the pop-up menu that appears. You can reopen the last closed tabs in the order in which
they were closed by selecting this command multiple times, if needed. You can also choose the “New
InPrivate tab” command from the pop-up menu to open a new InPrivate tab, which prevents Internet
m
Explorer from storing information about your browsing history while using the InPrivate tab.
You can click the “Favorites” button to display the “Favorites” section which allows you to manage
Sa
your listing of favorite web pages. You will see the folders within the “Favorites” folder shown as dark blue
squares showing only their names, as well as icons of the web pages you have saved to your “Favorites”
folder displayed within a scrollable list. You can click a folder at the left end to view the web pages saved

Using the Internet
ly!
9.3- Using the Internet Explorer 11 App- (cont'd.):
on
into that folder or you can click any web page icon shown to display that web page within the web browser.
You can also click the “Favorites” drop-down at the far upper-left end of the section to select a folder within
the “Favorites” folder to view in the “Favorites” section. You can then click the “All” link in this same area to
es
view all pages and folders within the “Favorites” folder in this section again.
You can right-click a web page icon shown in the “Favorites” section and select either the “Open in
new tab” command to open the web page in a new tab or the “Remove” command to remove the web page
os
from your “Favorites” section. You can delete a folder by right-clicking it and then choosing the “Remove”
command in the pop-up menu that appears. You must then click the “Delete” button in the confirmation
window to delete the folder. Note that doing this will also delete all web pages stored within that folder.
You can add a displayed web page to your “Favorites” section by clicking the “Add to favorites”
rp
button to display a pop-up menu where you can click into the top box and type a name for the web page, if
desired. You can then select into which of the “Favorites” folders to save the web page by selecting the
pu
name of one from the following drop-down menu. You can then click the “Add” button to add the web page
to the “Favorites” section. You could also click the “New folder” button to create a new folder within the
“Favorites” folder, instead. You can then enter the name for the folder and choose its parent folder from the
drop-down. Then click the “Create” button to create the new folder. You could also simply click the “Back”
n
button to cancel the folder creation and return to saving the favorite web page. You can simply click outside
of the “Favorite” pop-up to hide its display and cancel the addition of the web page if you change your mind.
tio
To pin the currently displayed web page to the Start screen for quick access, click the “Pin to start”
button within the “Favorites” section to open a pop-up box that allows you to select a tile icon and enter a
name for the page into the text box shown. Then click the “Pin to start” button to pin a tile for the web page
lua
to your Start screen.

To share the currently displayed web page, click the “Share” button in the “Favorites” section to
display the “Share” pane at the right side of the screen in the Charm Bar. You can then click the app that
you want to use to share the web page from the listing of available apps shown in the pane.
va
You can click the “Page tools” button in the black bar at the bottom of the screen to display a pop-up
menu of commands that are available. You can click the “Find on page” command to display a search bar
within the black bar at the bottom of the page that will allow you to search for specific text within a web
e
page. Enter the text to find within the “Find” text box. The text you type will appear highlighted within the
web page. You can then click the “Previous” and “Next” buttons to search for previous and next occurrences
of that text within the web page. When you are finished, you can click the “Close” button.
or
You can click the “View on the Desktop” command to open the selected web page using the
Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11. This will allow you to view the web page using a copy of Internet
-f
Explorer that allows for “add-ins” to be installed, so you can view web pages that use Flash content and
other web page extensions.
You can click the “View downloads” command to view files that you have downloaded through
ple
Internet Explorer 11 within the “Downloads” section. You can click on a file name in this list to select it. You
can then click in buttons in the lower-left corner of this section to manage the selected files. You can click
the “Open” button to open the selected file. You can click the “Open file location” to open the selected file’s
location within a File Explorer window. You can click the “Delete file” button to delete the selected file. You
m
can click the “Clear” button to clear the name of the file from the list in case you already deleted or moved
the file using File Explorer. If desired, you can clear the listing of all of the downloaded files by clicking the
Sa
“Clear list” button at the far lower-right end of the “Downloads” section.
To close the Internet Explorer 11 app, click and drag from the top of the app window to the bottom
and drag it off screen.

Using the Internet
ly!
9.4- Connecting to the Internet:
on
In order to use many features within Windows, you must establish a connection to the Internet. Many
offices and business computers will already have a connection to the Internet. At work, you can check with
your Network Administrator to find out how you would connect. At home, you will have to set up your own
es
connection to your ISP, which is an acronym for the term “internet service provider.”
Without a connection you will not be able to open web pages, download information, or send and
receive email. You can, however, look at emails you have already received and create new email to send
os
once you are connected to the Internet using an email application, such as Windows Mail.
There are many different types of both wired and wireless internet connections available. The
primary difference between them is whether you need to connect a cable to your computer to access the
rp
internet connection or not. The secondary difference is the speed with which information is transmitted and
received over the connection. The exact steps used to create your computer’s connection to the Internet will
be provided to you by your Internet Service Provider. Most often, you will create the internet connection for
pu
the PC when you perform the setup of Windows.
Once you have created the connection, you can view your connection information by opening the
Control Panel and then clicking the “Network and Internet” hyperlink in the “Category” view of the Control
Panel to show a listing of hyperlinks the Control Panel window that allow you to create or view the network
n
and Internet connection settings for your computer. Another way to view internet and network settings is to
open the “PC Settings” app and then click the “Network” category link at the left side of the page to view
tio
network and internet settings for your computer within the “PC Settings” app.
lua
9.5- Windows Defender in Windows 8.1:
While the Internet provides instant communication and information, there is a risk for your computer.
Computers can transmit and receive computer viruses and other harmful types of malware (bad software)
va
that can damage your computer or pose information security risks when connected to the Internet. For this
reason, it is absolutely essential that your computer be up-to-date with its Windows Updates and also
protected by some type of anti-virus program.
e
Windows Defender, previously known as Microsoft Security Essentials, is a free anti-virus, anti-
spyware, and anti-malware program installed by default in Windows 8.1. Note that you should not have any
other type of anti-virus program installed if you choose to use this program to avoid conflicts with the
or
software. With Windows Defender, you download periodic updates to the program through Windows Update
so that it stays current with its anti-virus information. You can also use it to scan your computer’s file and
-f
folders on a regular basis for any viruses or malware threats that are present.
To access Windows Defender, click the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start
screen to display all of the apps on your computer. Then click the “Windows Defender” app tile within the
ple
“Windows Systems” app grouping to open Windows Defender. On the “Home” tab, you can select a type of
scan to perform and then click the “Scan now” button to scan the files on your computer for infection. You
can click the “Update” tab to view your virus definitions and then click the “Update” button to manually
update the software, if needed. You can click the “History” tab to view any items that have been detected as
m
malicious by Windows Defender. You can click the “Settings” tab to set the default settings and behaviors of
the program. Here you can select a category setting at the left side of the tab, and then choose your desired
settings for that category at the right. When you are done, you can click the “Save changes” button at the
Sa
bottom of the program to save your changes or you can simply click the “x” in the upper-right corner to close
without saving changes if you did not make any.

ACTIONS-
Using the Internet
ly!
USING THE DESKTOP INTERNET EXPLORER 11 IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. Connect to the Internet.
2. To open the desktop version of Internet Explorer 11 in Windows 8.1, open the “Desktop” app and then
click the Internet Explorer 11 button in the Taskbar at the bottom of the Desktop.
es
3. Within the browser window, there is a “Title Bar” at the very top of the window that contains the three
buttons you can use to “Minimize," “Maximize,” and “Close” the browser located at the far right end.
4. At the far left end are the “Back” and “Forward” navigation buttons that allow you move back and
os
forward through the web pages you have visited.
5. The large white text box to the right of those two buttons is called the “Address Bar.” This bar displays
the web page address of the web page currently displayed on your screen.
rp
6. To view a web page by entering its URL, type the URL address (e.g. http://www.teachucomp.com) of
any page you want to view into the Address Bar and either click the “Go to” button, which is displayed
as an arrow button at the end of the Address Bar, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard to go to the
pu
web page address you entered.
7. The web page will then be displayed within the tab that appears to the right of the Address Bar.
8. In the center of the window is where you will view the content of the web page. Often you will find scroll
bars at the right and bottom of this area that allow you to scroll through the web page to see the entirety
of the web page. n
9. To search the web for web pages that may contain content for which you are searching, type the
tio
words or phrases for which you want to find matching web pages directly into the “Address Bar.”
10. Then click the “Go to” button, or press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, to display a search results web
page that shows hyperlinks of web pages that may contain content related to the terms for which you
lua
searched.
11. You can click these hyperlinks to view the associated web pages.
12. As you move from page to page, you can use the “Back” and “Forward” buttons in the upper left corner
of the window to move back to the results of the web search.
va
13. You can right-click a web page tab shown at the top of the window and then select the “New tab”
command from the pop-up menu that appears to open a new web page on a separate tab within Internet
Explorer 11.
e
14. You can then click between the open tabbed windows within the web browser window, so you can
easily keep information from multiple web pages in view.
15. You can close any tabbed page within the program by clicking the small “x” button at the right end of
or
any tab shown.

16. To find specific text within a web page displayed within Internet Explorer, click the “Tools” button.
-f
This is the button that look like a cog and is displayed in the upper-right corner of the window.
17. After clicking this button, roll down to the “File” command in the drop-down menu that appears, and then
click the “Find on this page” command in the side menu that appears.
ple
18. Doing that will open a “Find” bar at the top of the window, below the “Address Bar,” where you can enter
the text to find on the page into the “Find” text box.
19. You can then click the “Previous” and “Next” buttons to jump to the different occurrences of the text
within the page.
m
20. You can then click the “x” button at the left end of the “Find” bar to close it when you are finished.
Sa

ACTIONS-
Using the Internet
ly!
USING THE INTERNET EXPLORER 11 APP IN WINDOWS 8.1:
on
1. Click the Internet Explorer 11 app tile in the Start screen to open a new browser window.
2. At the bottom of the browser window you will see a black bar that contains the buttons you need to view
web pages. The buttons you will see from left to right are the “Back” button, the application or web page
es
icon, the “Address Bar,” the “Refresh” button, the “Tabs” button, the “Favorites” button, the “Page tools”
button, and the “Forward” button.
3. To view a web page, type the desired URL address (example: http://www.teachucomp.com) into the
os
“Address Bar.”
4. When you have finished typing the URL, you can either press the “Enter” key on your keyboard, or tap
or click the “Go” arrow button that appears at the right end of the “Address Bar” when you begin typing
rp
the URL.
5. Note that as you begin typing the URL address, Internet Explorer 11 will display web pages that it thinks
you may want to visit, based on what you type and web pages that you have previously visited, as icons
pu
shown above the address bar. If one of these suggestions shows the URL that you want to visit, you can
click or tap on the icon shown to display that web page in the web browser window instead of finishing
typing the full URL address.
6. You can click the “Back” button in the black bar at the bottom of the page to return to the previously
viewed web page. n
7. If you click the “Back” button, you can click the “Forward” button in the black bar at the bottom of the
tio
page to move forward to the web page you left.
8. You can click the “Refresh” button in the black bar at the bottom of the page to refresh the content
shown within the web page, if needed.
lua
9. If you click into the content of the web page, the black bar at the bottom of the page will turn into a very
thin line with three white dots displayed towards the right end. This allows you to completely remove the
black bar from the display to create a more immersive experience when you are browsing the web.
10. You can place your mouse pointer at the very bottom of the screen until the line color changes slightly
va
and then click to display the black bar again.

11. You can click the “Tabs” button to reveal the “Tabs” section which will display any web pages within any
open tabs or to open a new tab within which you can display another web page. You can also right-click
e
within a web page to quickly view the “Tabs” section, if desired.

12. To open a new tab, click the “New tab” button within the “Tabs” section, which looks like a plus sign, to
display a new tab.
or
13. Then enter the web page to view into the Address Bar to display the web page within the new tab.
14. To switch between opened tabs, display the “Tabs” section. The opened tabs will be displayed as
-f
icons at the left side of this section.

15. Click the icon of the page to view it onscreen.
16. You can then click into the page to hide the “Tabs” section again.
ple
17. To close a tab, display the “Tabs” section and then click the small “X” button in the lower-right corner of
the tab icon that you want to close. The tab icon will then disappear.
18. To reopen a closed tab, click the “Tab tools” button and then select the “Reopen closed tab” command
from the pop-up menu that appears. You can reopen the last closed tabs in the order in which they were
m
closed by selecting this command multiple times, if needed.

19. You can also choose the “New InPrivate tab” command from the pop-up menu to open a new InPrivate
Sa
tab, which prevents Internet Explorer from storing information about your browsing history while using
the InPrivate tab.
(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
Using the Internet
ly!
USING THE INTERNET EXPLORER 11 APP IN WINDOWS 8.1- (CONT’D.):
on
20. You can click the “Favorites” button to display the “Favorites” section which allows you to manage your
listing of favorite web pages.
21. You will see the folders within the “Favorites” folder shown as dark blue squares showing only their
es
names, as well as icons of the web pages you have saved to your “Favorites” folder displayed within a
scrollable list.
22. You can click a folder at the left end to view the web pages saved into that folder or you can click any
os
web page icon shown to display that web page within the web browser.
23. You can also click the “Favorites” drop-down at the far upper-left end of the section to select a folder
within the “Favorites” folder to view in the “Favorites” section.
24. You can then click the “All” link in this same area to view all pages and folders within the “Favorites”
rp
folder in this section again.
25. You can right-click a web page icon shown in the “Favorites” section and select either the “Open in new
pu
tab” command to open the web page in a new tab or the “Remove” command to remove the web page
from your “Favorites” section.
26. You can delete a folder by right-clicking it and then choosing the “Remove” command in the pop-up
menu that appears.
n
27. You must then click the “Delete” button in the confirmation window to delete the folder. Note that doing
this will also delete all web pages stored within that folder.
tio
28. To add a displayed web page to your “Favorites” section, click the “Add to favorites” button to
display a pop-up menu where you can click into the top box and type a name for the web page, if
desired.
lua
29. You can select into which of the “Favorites” folders to save the web page by selecting the name of one
from the following drop-down menu.
30. Click the “Add” button to add the web page to the “Favorites” section.
31. You could also click the “New folder” button to create a new folder within the “Favorites” folder, instead.
va
32. You then enter the name for the folder and choose its parent folder from the drop-down.
33. Then click the “Create” button to create the new folder. You could also simply click the “Back” button to
cancel the folder creation and return to saving the favorite web page.
e
34. You can simply click outside of the “Favorite” pop-up to hide its display and cancel the addition of the
web page if you change your mind.
35. To pin the currently displayed web page to the Start screen for quick access, click the “Pin to start”
or
button within the “Favorites” section to open a pop-up box that allows you to select a tile icon and enter
a name for the page into the text box shown.
-f
36. Then click the “Pin to start” button to pin a tile for the web page to your Start screen.
37. To share the currently displayed web page, click the “Share” button in the “Favorites” section to
display the “Share” pane at the right side of the screen in the Charm Bar.
ple
38. You can then click the app that you want to use to share the web page from the listing of available apps
shown in the pane.
39. To find text within a web page, open a web page in the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11,
or to manage your downloaded files, start by clicking the “Page tools” button in the black bar at the
m
bottom of the screen to display a pop-up menu of commands that are available.
40. To find text within a web page, click the “Find on page” command to display a search bar within the
Sa
black bar at the bottom of the page.

41. Enter the text to find within the “Find” text box. The text you type will appear highlighted in the page.
(cont'd.)

ACTIONS-
Using the Internet
ly!
USING THE INTERNET EXPLORER 11 APP IN WINDOWS 8.1- (CONT'D.):
on
42. You can then click the “Previous” and “Next” buttons to search for previous and next occurrences of that
text within the web page.
43. When you are finished, you can click the “Close” button.
es
44. To view a web page within the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11, click the “View on the
Desktop” command to open the selected web page using the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11.
45. To manage your downloaded files, click the “View downloads” command to view files that you have
os
downloaded through Internet Explorer 11 within the “Downloads” section.
46. You can click on a file name in this list to select it. You can then click in buttons in the lower-left corner
of this section to manage the selected files.
47. You can click the “Open” button to open the selected file.
rp
48. You can click the “Open file location” to open the selected file’s location within a File Explorer window.
49. You can click the “Delete file” button to delete the selected file.
pu
50. You can click the “Clear” button to clear the name of the file from the list in case you already deleted or
moved the file using File Explorer.
51. If desired, you can clear the listing of all of the downloaded files by clicking the “Clear list” button at the
far lower-right end of the “Downloads” section.
n
52. To close the Internet Explorer 11 app, click and drag from the top of the app window to the bottom
and drag it off screen.
tio
VIEWING NETWORK AND INTERNET CONNECTION SETTINGS:
lua
1. After creating an internet connection, you can view your connection information by opening the Control
Panel and then clicking the “Network and Internet” hyperlink in the “Category” view of the Control Panel
to show a listing of hyperlinks the Control Panel window that allow you to create or view the network and
va
Internet connection settings for your computer.

2. Another way to view internet and network settings is to open the “PC Settings” app and then click the
“Network” category link at the left side of the page to view network and internet settings for your
computer within the “PC Settings” app.
e
or
USING WINDOWS DEFENDER IN WINDOWS 8.1:
1. To open Windows Defender, click the downward-pointing arrow in the lower-left corner of the Start
-f
screen to display all of the apps on your computer and then click the “Windows Defender” app tile within
the “Windows Systems” app grouping.
2. To scan your computer for infection, click the “Home” tab, select a type of scan to perform, and then
ple
click the “Scan now” button.

3. To manually update the software, click the “Update” tab and then click the “Update” button.
4. To view any items detected as malicious during any computer scans, click the “History” tab.
5. To set the default settings and behaviors of the program, click the “Settings” tab, select a category
m
setting at the left side of the tab, and then choose your desired settings for that category to the right.
6. When you are done, you can click the “Save changes” button at the bottom of the program to save your
Sa
changes or click the “x” in the upper-right corner of the program window to close it without saving
changes if you did not make any.

EXERCISES-
Using the Internet
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. To learn how to use Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11 to view a web page.
Exercises:
es
Note: Your computer must be connected to the Internet to complete this Exercise.
os
1. In Windows 8.1, click the “Desktop” app tile within the Start screen to open the Desktop.
2. Click the “Internet Explorer” button shown in the Taskbar at the bottom of the Desktop.
3. Click into the Address Bar and then type “Windows 8.”
rp
4. Click the “Go to” button at the right end of the Address Bar.
5. Click any desired hyperlink shown in the search results web page to visit the selected page.
pu
6. Click into the Address Bar and then type www.teachucomp.com.
7. Then press the “Enter” key on your keyboard.
8. Click the “Back” button in the upper-left corner of the window to return to the previous web page.
9. Click the “X” button in the upper right corner of the “Internet Explorer” window to close it.
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

CHAPTER 10-
Printing Information
ly!
on
10.1- Selecting a Printer
10.2- General Printing Options
es
10.3- Managing Print Jobs
os
10.4- Printing from Internet Explorer 11
rp
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

ly!
10.1- Selecting a Printer:
on
If you have more than one printer or are on a network, you may have the option of printing to more
than one printer. When you are using a program like Microsoft Word, you may want to print a hard copy of
your document. In most Windows-based programs, you can print the current document by clicking the
es
“Print” button within the “File” tab of the Ribbon. This will often display a “Print” dialog box or “Print” page,
where you can select your printer choice.
You can also set a “default” printer in Windows, which is the printer to which all print jobs will be sent
os
if you don’t make a specific choice in the matter when printing. To do this, you must access the “Devices
and Printers” folder in Windows 8.1. You can open this folder by opening the Control Panel and then
clicking the “View devices and printers” hyperlink in the “Category” view of the Control Panel to open a
rp
window where you can see all the printers installed and available. Right-click the icon of the printer you
want to make the “default” printer and then click the “Set as default printer” command from the pop-up menu
that appears. This should place a check mark next to the printer that you selected. At that point, you can
pu
close the window.
10.2- General Printing Options:

n
Depending on which program you are printing from, the options that you may have for printing can
tio
vary slightly, but in general there are some things that you can almost always change about the printing
options.
You may see the choice of setting a “Page Range.” Most programs allow you to print all pages,
lua
some pages, or just a single page of your document. Another common option is entering the “Number of
copies” to print. You may also be able to “Collate” multiple printed copies by checking a checkbox for that
feature.
Once you have set any available printing options that you may have through your program, simply
va
click the “Print” or “OK” button to start printing your document.
10.3- Managing Print Jobs:

e
Sometimes you need to check the status of a print job that you have sent to a printer. To do this,
or
double-click the “Printer” icon that often appears in the lower right corner notification area of the Taskbar
within the Desktop after the print job has been sent. In the “Printer” window that appears, select the print job
that you sent from the list shown to see its status.
-f
If you need to cancel the print job, right-click the print job shown within the list and select “Cancel”
from the pop-up menu that appears. In a few moments the print job will disappear.
ple
You can then close the “Printer” window, and the little printer icon that was displayed in the lower
right corner of the Taskbar should disappear as well.
m
Sa

ly!
10.4- Printing from Internet Explorer 11:
on
You can print web pages that are displayed within Internet Explorer 11. However, the process differs
between the app and desktop versions of Internet Explorer 11. You may also have some options when
printing web page content that you do not normally have when printing from other apps or program as web
es
pages have content that is arranged in a manner that is different from other types of printable materials,
such as a standard word processing document.
Printing a web page from the app version of Internet Explorer 11 is very much like printing from
os
within any app in Windows 8.1. First display the web page that you want to print within the Internet Explorer
11 app. Then display the Charm Bar by rolling to the upper-right or lower-right corners of the screen or
swiping in from the right edge, if using a tablet. Click the “Devices” button within the Charm Bar and then
click the “Print” button within the “Devices” pane to show the listing of available printers to use. Click the
rp
name of the printer that you want to use to print the web page from the listing shown.
You will then see the name of the printer at the top of the page, next to a “Back” arrow button that
pu
you can click to select a different printer, if needed. You will also see a small print preview of how the web
page will print displayed in the pane. You can click the arrows that appear on multi-page print previews to
scroll through the pages to print and inspect each one, if desired.
To the right of the print preview you will see the printing options. You can change the “Orientation,”
n
“Copies,” “Pages,” Print size,” “Turn headers and footers on or off,” and “Margins.” You can click the “More
options” hyperlink to display a page of printer-specific settings that you can change and then click the
tio
“Back” arrow to return to the main printing option pane.
When you are ready to print the web page, click the “Print” button below the printing options to print
the selected web page.
lua
To print from the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11, first display the web page that you want to
print within the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11. Then click the “Tools” button in the upper-right
corner, roll over the “Print” command and then select the “Print…” command in the side menu that appears
to open the “Print” dialog box.
va
Click the “General” tab within the “Print” dialog box to set the general printing options. Select the
printer to use to print the web page from the choices shown in the “Select printer” list. You can set the range
of pages to print by making a choice from the “Page Range” section. You can enter the number of copies to
e
print by typing the desired number into the “Number of copies” text box. If printing multiple copies, you can
leave the “Collate” checkbox checked to print the copies collated.
You often have additional printing options that are specific to web pages that you can set on the
or
“Options” tab. If you are printing a site that uses frames, then you can choose how to print the content of
each frame within the “Print frames” section. A web page that uses frames is not very common anymore,
-f
but if you encounter a web page that uses frames, it would be best to select the “All frames individually”
option button in this section if you are worried about information not appearing when you print it. If you
check the to “Print all linked documents” checkbox, you can print any pages that are linked to the page that
ple
you are currently printing. For many web pages, selecting this checkbox may cause you to print many
unnecessary pages. However, it can be useful to print all linked pages within a main chapter web page
shown within an online help file, for example. You can also check the checkbox for the “Print table of links”
checkbox to print a table that lists all of the hyperlinks within the web page as part of the printout. When you
m
are ready to print the web page, click the “Print” button at the bottom of the “Print” dialog box.
Sa

ACTIONS-
ly!
SELECTING A DEFAULT PRINTER:
on
1. To select a default printer, open the Control Panel window and then clicking the “View devices and
printers” hyperlink in the “Category” view of the Control Panel window to see all the printers installed
and available.
es
2. Right-click the icon of the printer you want to make the “default” printer.
3. Click the “Set as default printer” command within the pop-up menu that appears. This should place a
check mark next to the printer that you selected.
os
4. You can then close the window by clicking the “X” in the upper-right corner.
GENERAL PRINTING OPTIONS:
rp
1. Depending on which program you are printing from, the options that you may have for printing can vary
pu
slightly, but in general there are some things that you can almost always change about the printing
options.
2. You may see the choice of setting a “Page Range.” Most programs allow you to print all pages, some
pages, or just a single page of your document.
3. Another common option is entering the “Number of copies” to print.
n
4. You may also be able to “Collate” multiple printed copies by checking a checkbox for that feature.
tio
5. Once you have set any available printing options that you may have through your program, simply click
the “Print” or “OK” button to start printing your document.
lua
MANAGING PRINT JOBS:
1. To check the status of a print job that you have sent, double-click the “Printer” icon that appears in the
va
lower right corner notification area of the Taskbar when the print job is being sent.
2. In the “Printer” window, select you print job from the list and you will be able to see its status.
3. If you need to cancel the print job, right-click it and select “Cancel” from the pop-up menu that appears.
In a few moments the print job will disappear.
e
4. You can then close the “Printer” window.

or
PRINTING FROM INTERNET EXPLORER 11:

-f
1. To print a web page from the app version of Internet Explorer 11, display the web page that you
want to print within the Internet Explorer 11 app.
2. Display the Charm Bar by rolling to the upper-right or lower-right corners of the screen or swiping in
ple
from the right edge, if using a tablet.

3. Click the “Devices” button within the Charm Bar and then click the “Print” button within the “Devices”
pane to show the listing of available printers to use.
4. Click the name of the printer that you want to use to print the web page from the listing shown.
m
5. You will then see the name of the printer at the top of the page, next to a “Back” arrow button that you
can click to select a different printer, if needed.
Sa
6. You will also see a print preview of how the web page will print displayed in the pane. You can click the
arrows that appear on multi-page print previews to scroll through the pages and inspect each one.
(cont’d.)

ACTIONS-
ly!
PRINTING FROM INTERNET EXPLORER 11- (CONT’D.):
on
7. To the right of the print preview you will see the printing options. You can change the “Orientation,”
“Copies,” “Pages,” Print size,” “Turn headers and footers on or off,” and “Margins.”
8. You can click the “More options” hyperlink to display a page of printer-specific settings that you can
es
change and then click the “Back” arrow to return to the main printing option pane.
9. Click the “Print” button below the printing options to print the selected web page.
10. To print from the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11, first display the web page that you want to
os
print within the Desktop version of Internet Explorer 11.
11. Click the “Tools” button in the upper-right corner, roll over the “Print” command and then select the
“Print…” command in the side menu that appears to open the “Print” dialog box.
12. Click the “General” tab within the “Print” dialog box to set the general printing options.
rp
13. Select the printer to use to print the web page from the choices shown in the “Select printer” list.
14. Set the range of pages to print by making a choice from the “Page Range” section.
pu
15. Enter the number of copies to print by typing the desired number into the “Number of copies” text box.
16. If printing multiple copies, you can leave the “Collate” checkbox checked to print the copies collated.
17. To set additional printing options that are specific to web pages click the “Options” tab.
18. If you are printing a site that uses frames, you can choose how to print the content of each frame within
the “Print frames” section. n
19. If you check the to “Print all linked documents” checkbox, you can print any pages that are linked to the
tio
page that you are currently printing.
20. You can also check the checkbox for the “Print table of links” checkbox to print a table that lists all of the
hyperlinks within the web page as part of the printout.
lua
21. When you are ready to print the web page, click the “Print” button at the bottom of the “Print” dialog box.
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

EXERCISES-
ly!
Purpose:
on
1. There are no exercises for this chapter.
es
os
rp
pu
n
tio
lua
e va
or
-f
ple
m
Sa

Windows 8.1 Keyboard Shortcuts
ly!
on
Command/Activity Keyboard Shortcut Command/Activity Keyboard Shortcut
Copy Ctrl + C or Ctrl + Insert Open the Shortcut Menu Alt + Spacebar
for the Active Window
Cut Ctrl + X or Shift + Del
Close the Active Ctrl + F4
es
Paste Ctrl + V or Shift + Insert Documents in Programs
Undo Ctrl + Z or Alt + Backspace that Allows Multiple
Documents to be Opened
os
Delete Delete
Switch Between Open Alt + Tab
Delete Permanently, Shift + Delete Windows
Bypassing the Recycle Bin
rp
Cycle Through Items in the Alt + Esc
Copy Selected Item Ctrl while dragging an item Order They were Opened
Create Shortcut to Selected Ctrl + Shift while dragging an item Cycle Through Screen F6
pu
Item Elements in a Window or
Rename Selected Item F2 on the Desktop
Move the Insertion Point to Ctrl + Right Arrow Display the Address bar list F4
the Beginning of the Next in “File Explorer”
n
Word
tio
Move the Insertion Point to Ctrl + Left Arrow Display the Shortcut Menu Shift + F10
the Beginning of the for the Selected Item
Previous Word Display the System Menu Alt + Spacebar
lua
Move the Insertion Point to Ctrl + Down Arrow for the Active Menu
the Beginning of the Next Show the Start screen or Ctrl + Esc
Paragraph
Display a Corresponding Alt + Underlined Letter in a
va
Move the Insertion Point to Ctrl + Up Arrow Menu Menu Name

the Beginning of the
Previous Paragraph Carry Out the Underlined Letter in a
Corresponding Command Command Name on an Open
e
Highlight a Block of Text Ctrl + Shift with any of the Arrow Menu
Keys
Activate Hotkeys within the F10
or
Select Multiple Items in a Shift with any of the Arrow Keys Ribbon
Window or on the Desktop,
or Select Text within a Show the Next Tab to the Right Arrow after activating
-f
Document Right in the Ribbon Hotkeys
Select All Ctrl + A Show the Next Tab to the Left Arrow after activating
ple
Left in the Ribbon Hotkeys

Search for a File or Folder F3
Refresh the Active Window F5
View Properties for the Alt + Enter
Selected Item View the Folder One Level Backspace
Up in “File Explorer”
m
Close the Active Item, or Alt + F4

Quit the Active Program Cancel the Current Task Esc
Sa
Display Properties of a Alt + Enter Prevent a CD or DVD from Hold Shift when Inserting CD or
Selected Object using AutoPlay DVD into CD or DVD Drive

Windows 8.1 Keyboard Shortcuts
ly!
on
Command/Activity Keyboard Shortcut Command/Activity Keyboard Shortcut
Move Forward Through Tabs Ctrl + Tab Display or hide the Start
in a Dialog Box screen
Move Backward Through Ctrl + Shift + Tab
es
Tabs in a Dialog Box Show the Desktop +D
Move Forward Through Tab Minimize All Windows +M
Options
os
Restores Minimized + Shift + M
Move Backward Through Shift + Tab Windows
Options
Open File Explorer +E
rp
Carry Out the Corresponding Alt + Underlined Letter
Command or Select the Search for a File or Folder +F
Corresponding Option
pu
Display Windows Help + F1
Carry Out the Command for Enter Open the “Run” Dialog Box +R
the Active Option or Button
Select or Clear the Check Spacebar Display Shortcut Menu for
n
Box if the Active Option is a the Selected Item
Check Box
tio
Aero Peek (Temporarily + , (comma in 8.1)
Select a Button if the Active Arrow Keys Shows Desktop)
Option is a Group of Option
Buttons Snap Window Left + Left Arrow
lua
Display Help F1 Snap Window Right + Right Arrow
Display the Items in the F4 Zoom Desktop In + ’+’ (Plus sign)

Active List
va
Zoom Desktop Out + ’-’ (Minus sign)

Open a Folder one Level Up Backspace
Open Charm Bar in 8.1 +C
if a Folder is Selected in the
“Save As” or “Open” Dialog Open Settings in 8.1 +I
e
Box
Search Settings in 8.1 +W
Create a new program Middle mouse button click OR
or
instance in the Taskbar Search Everywhere in 8.1 +Q

Shift + Left Click
Show Options Bar when in +Z
Show classic right-click Shift + Right Click
-f
Start Screen in 8.1

program menu in Taskbar
Show Devices in 8.1 +K
Pop-up System Functions in +X
ple
8.1 Lock Screen in 8.1 +L

Display Settings in 8.1 +P Share Options in 8.1 +H
Ease of Access in 8.1 +U Show Sign-out and Task Ctrl + Alt + Del
m
Manager Options in 8.1

Take Desktop Screenshot in + PrtSc (Print Screen key)
8
Sa
Unlock Lock Screen in 8 Ctrl

Shut Down Options Alt + F4

Windows Manual PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Windows Manual PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

ly!

A Presentation of TeachUcomp Incorporated.

…it’s all about you

Phone: (877) 925-8080

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 2

Windows on laptops, tablets, and other mobile computing

on many of your devices, you can now share a more

This class is designed to give you a general overview

course, you will explore the basics of using Windows:

working with files, creating and saving documents,

settings, and using Internet Explorer 11.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 3

2.12- Deleting Files 33 8.2- Drawing Shapes and Lines 116

Drawing Pictures- Actions 118-119

CHAPTER 4- Control Panel Settings 74 10.3- Managing Print Jobs 133

4.6- Audio Adjustment 80

Control Panel Settings- Actions 82-87

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 4

1.2- The Start Screen in Windows 8.1

1.9- Touch Gestures in Windows 8.1

1.10- App Snapping in Windows 8.1

1.11- Using a Microsoft User Account in Windows 8.1

1.12- Resizing a Desktop Window

1.13- Scrolling a Window

1.14- Shutting Down Windows

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 5

Microsoft website at http://www.microsoft.com.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 6

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 7

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 8

1.4- Using the Charm Bar in Windows 8.1:

1.5- The Windows Desktop:

well as the date and time.

1.6- The Start Button:

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 11

Left-click or “click” A single “press and release”

the left mouse button in

to a new location and then

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 12

Name: Movement: What it is used for:

and dragging with your mouse.

edge of the screen to open the Charm Bar, swipe in

commands. You can swipe from the top of an app to

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 13

1.11- Using a Microsoft User Account in Windows 8.1:

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 14

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 15

1.14- Shutting Down Windows:

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 16

the tabbed browser window you want to display.

for text entry to replace the traditional keyboard.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 17

then releasing the app tile to create a new tile grouping.

the options bar.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 18

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 19

THE START BUTTON:

BOOTING TO THE DESKTOP:

desktop instead of Start” checkbox to enable booting to the desktop.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 20

TOUCH GESTURES IN WINDOWS 8.1: n

that is tapped. Similar to a left-mouse click.

©TeachUcomp, Inc. Mastering Windows Made Easy v. 8.1 21